JP2021019855A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: first display means; and second display means different from the first display means. The first and second display means can execute respectively, a plurality of kinds of display performances, and as one of the plurality of kinds of display performances, a first display performance may be performed, and as one of the plurality of kinds of display performances, a second display performance may be performed. The first display performance is a performance for displaying a decorative pattern on the first display means, the second display performance is a performance for displaying the decorative pattern in a prescribed stop mode on the first and second display means, and sometimes a combination performance including the first and second display performances is performed, in the combination performance, the second display performance is performed after the first display performance, and a prescribed image is displayed on third display means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a game ball wins a prize at the start port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

JP-A-2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned game machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine including a second display means and a third display means different from the first display means and the first display means.
Each of the first display means and the second display means can execute a plurality of types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative pattern on the first display means.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the decorative symbol in a predetermined stop mode in the first display means and the second display means.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and a predetermined image is displayed on the third display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect in the same variation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 3]
The gaming machine according to the application example 1 or the application example 2.
The predetermined stop mode of the decorative symbol in the second display effect is a mode representing a jackpot symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 4]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 3
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect in which the same symbol as the symbol forming the jackpot symbol in the second display effect is moved and displayed in the first display means and the second display means.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the same decorative symbol is moved and displayed in the first display means and the second display means.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed, the first display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the second display effect is performed after the first display effect. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination tables T1 to T4, T10. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the core production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up production pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during the variation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the right rotation of the left sub-display device 10L. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the left sub-display device 10L. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the upward movement of the right sub-display device 10R. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the left rotation of the right sub-display device 10R. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the right sub-display device 10R. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the upward movement of the left-right sub-display device 10. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the advance movement of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the rotation operation of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the rotation operation of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st combination effect of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd combination effect of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display device interlocking effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display device interlocking effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display device interlocking effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display device interlocking effect D. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect A. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect C. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the special variation effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the special variation effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the special variation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the special variation effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the plurality of image pseudo continuous production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the plurality of image pseudo continuous production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the plurality of image pseudo continuous production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the plurality of image pseudo continuous production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the hold arrangement direction change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the hold arrangement direction change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the hold arrangement direction change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the hold arrangement direction change effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold movement effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold movement effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold movement effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold movement effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the information display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the information display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the information display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the information display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold icon interlocking effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold icon interlocking effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold icon interlocking effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold icon interlocking effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold change suggestion effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold change suggestion effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold change suggestion effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold change suggestion effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decoration pattern display mode effect A. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern display mode effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern display mode effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decoration pattern display mode effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern variation effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern variation effect B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern variation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern variation effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pseudo continuous production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pseudo continuous production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pseudo continuous production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pseudo continuous production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern facing effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern facing effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern facing effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern facing effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image tilt display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image tilt display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image tilt display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image tilt display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern button stop effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern button stop effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern button stop effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern button stop effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the effect execution confirmation effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the effect execution confirmation effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the effect execution confirmation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the effect execution confirmation effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the two-direction group production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the bidirectional group production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the bidirectional group production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the two-direction group production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the acquisition ball output display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the acquisition ball output display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the acquisition ball output display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the acquisition ball output display effect D.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the game machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction as seen by the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the game machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the game machine 1.

The game machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the ball hitting plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. The frame lamp 66 is arranged above the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, a main display device 7, a sub display device 10, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and the like. Ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22, gate (through chucker) 28, first big winning device (first attacker) 31, second big winning device (second attacker) 36, big winning opening open start It is provided with a mouth 17, a general winning mouth 27 (ordinary winning mouth 27), an out mouth 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp 66R and the left frame lamp 66L, and is configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The main display device 7 is an image display device provided near the center of the game area 3 and provided with a display screen 7a. The main display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display).

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". In the left symbol display area, the left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of, for example, a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The main display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the main display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol", "variable effect of the decorative symbol", or simply "variable effect" and "variable display". In the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

In addition to the effect symbol variation effect, the main display device 7 can display a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like on the display screen 7a. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the main display device 7 is an identification display capable of suggesting that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The sub-display device 10 includes a left sub-display device 10L and a right sub-display device 10R, each of which is an image display device arranged in front of the main display device 7. The left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are movable gimmicks each having a display screen, and the position and orientation of the display screen can be changed by a mechanism unit (not shown). Like the main display device 7, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R may be liquid crystal display devices, or other image display devices such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, and a dot matrix. It may be. The left sub-display device 10L is arranged at the lower left of the main display device 7 and has a first hold image display area on which the hold image 9A is displayed. In the first reserved image display area, the reserved image 9A is displayed according to the number of stored first special figure reservations described later. The right sub-display device 10R is arranged at the lower right of the main display device 7, and has a second reserved image display area on which the reserved image 9B is displayed and a reserved digested image display area on which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. doing. have. In the second reserved image display area, the reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored images of the second special figure reserved, which will be described later. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C or the hold icon 9C. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to as a hold icon. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a described later and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are displayed. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen of the sub display device 10, and the first special feature is displayed by displaying the hold digestion image 9C. It is possible to clearly display to the player that the figure hold or the second special figure hold is digested (“digestion of the special figure hold” described later).

On the left and right sides of the main display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semicircular members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the main display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( (Advance) and can stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 53 to 55). The first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the main display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

On the upper side of the main display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the main display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It can be stationary at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a (FIGS. 56 to 59). The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the main display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the sub display device 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the sub display device 10. The warp portion 12 includes an entrance portion through which the game balls flow in and an outlet portion through which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance portion flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the image displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 can be visually recognized via the illumination panel 18. There is. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating the end surface with LED light. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a small number of types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the main display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided with a port (fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (small hit and big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 may be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, and the second starting port 21 should be in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (winning random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol jackpot lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting opening 21, a jackpot random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired jackpot random number is used. A process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot by comparing it with a value corresponding to a predetermined "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is displayed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the main display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol is played, and the big hit lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this symbol matching game.

Further, in the "special symbol small hit lottery", when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 21, a small hit random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired small hit random number is predetermined. It refers to a process of determining whether or not a small hit is made by comparing with a value corresponding to the "small hit". The lottery result of this "small hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 41b described later, and the lottery is performed when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. The special symbol corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the main display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol is played, and the small hit lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this symbol matching game. ..

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". This is a process of determining whether or not a hit is achieved. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines a predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and is arranged with the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70, for example. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be (second state). In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability variation operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probability variation operation port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, small hit attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special). It is equipped with a winning opening) 35. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. This second big winning device is a small hit attacker that operates when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 21 and is won by a small hit lottery.

The large winning opening opening opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes through.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left hit". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbol”. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery (big hit lottery) based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. Notify the result. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the big winning openings (1st big winning opening 30 and 2nd big winning opening 35) in the big hit game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 displays the special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops the display to notify the result of the lottery (small hit lottery) based on the winning of the second starting port 21. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (small hit symbol) in a predetermined small hit stop mode, a special game (small hit game) in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern is performed. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If a small hit is won, the small hit symbol with the first and second LEDs from the left lit is displayed, such as "○○ ●●●●●●" (○: lit, ●: off). If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. As for the variation display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is set as the normal symbol hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the game machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. As the sensors connected via the relay board 88, the large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, and the first Two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large winning opening open start opening 17, and detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening open start opening 17. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the game machine 1 and outputs information on ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the main display device 7 and the sub display devices 10 (left sub display device 10L, right sub display device 10R) according to a program. Do it. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols. Etc. (including production symbols) and image data such as background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, or acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The sub-display device 10, the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the sub display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the sub-display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15, according to the operation pattern data. It controls the operations of the sub-display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to perform command-based lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed.

3. 3. Data structure of the game machine The data structure of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5 (A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9, and the small hit determination table T10 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5 (B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-determination command, a hold ball number command, The fluctuation start command, fluctuation stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V passage command, customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, A small hit flag, a V flag, a probability change flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number value group (holding information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure reservation is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 stores a random number value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the sub-display device 10 and the movable accessories 14 and 15. A drive data buffer or the like is provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later) (described later). Output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Probability change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 includes "big hit random numbers", "big hit type random numbers", "reach random numbers", "variable pattern random numbers", "ordinary symbol random numbers (hit random numbers)", and "small hit random numbers". Is configured to be acquired at the timing described later. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used in the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Ordinary symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0 to 255. The "small hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (small hit determination) for whether or not it is a small hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The "small hit random number" is acquired based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is stored. It is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8 (C) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, FIG. 8 (D) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and FIG. 8 (E) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4. , A diagram for explaining the small hit determination table T10 is shown.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164" in the "normal probability state", it is determined as "big hit" (about probability 1/397), and the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164". In the case of "a numerical value other than (165 to 65535)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit" (about 1/101), and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than "0 to 649" (650). In the case of "~ 65535)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. Note that this reach determination table T2 is not referred to when the above-acquired jackpot random number value corresponds to "big hit". In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined as "with reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6-127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). It is a table referenced to do. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". Is shown.

In the small hit determination table T10, the small hit random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "small hit" or "miss". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. The small hit determination table T10 is not referred to when the above-acquired big hit random value corresponds to "big hit". In FIG. 8 (E), in all states (regardless of the gaming state), when the small hit random value is "0 to 63", it is determined as "small hit" (probability 1/2), and the small hit disorder When the numerical value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 63 (64 to 127)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". The small hit determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when the game ball wins the second start opening 21 (not referred to when the game ball wins the first start opening 20). Further, the small hit determination table T10 is a table that is not referred to when it is determined to be a "big hit".

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 shows the "big hit type" and the "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of 1 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 40", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "41-82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the stop symbol of special figure 2 (special figure stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". .. When the jackpot type random value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game "Command" can also be specified. About the specific contents of "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In addition, the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted in the non-time saving state (since it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 in the non-time saving state, the time saving state (high accuracy and high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time saving state). When the time is shortened (low accuracy and low base state), the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted), and the jackpot determination table T1 determines that the jackpot is "big hit", and the jackpot type determination table T5 indicates that the jackpot is scheduled to pass 16RV. , "Big hit symbol 2 (21H)", and when the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P22". Further, in the non-time saving state, the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted, and it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is " It is shown that it is determined as "P34".

In FIG. 11, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a short time state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "no reach", and the number of reserved balls is "3 to". 4 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 127 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P56 ”. In addition, the second starting port 21 is won in a short time state, and it is determined as "big hit" in the jackpot determination table T1 and "16RV passing jackpot" and "big hit symbol 2 (21H)" in the jackpot type determination table T5. , Fluctuation pattern When the random value is "0 to 127", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P62". Further, when the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is "P74". It has been shown to be determined.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. For example, when the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted in the non-time saving state and it is determined to be a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P34" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 15000 msec. Further, when the second starting port 21 is won in a time-saving state and a small hit is determined, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P74" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, during the time saving state (high probability high base state), it is also during the small hit rush (RUSH) period described later until the next big hit, that is, during the small hit rush period, when the second starting port 21 is won. Since the fluctuation time is 3000 msec and the small hit probability is 1/2, small hits occur frequently in a short time. Then, during the small hit rush period, you can aim for a big hit while increasing the number of game balls you have. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream. In particular, SP5 has a variation pattern of a dedicated reach in which a pseudo jackpot suggestion effect is performed by winning a prize at the second starting port 21 during the small hit rush (RUSH) period that occurs in the time saving state (high accuracy and high base state) described later. "P62"). It should be noted that SP5 also occurs during the hold digestion of the second starting port 21 when the time saving state (high accuracy high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time saving state, low accuracy low base state) is reached. In some cases, a pseudo jackpot suggestion effect can be performed in this case as well (variation pattern “P22”).

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 shows the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13A, as the big winning opening opening pattern in the big hit game, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, “20H”, or “21H”, the first big winning opening 30 and The opening pattern of the 2nd prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize The opening pattern of the mouth 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is "opening pattern 23". It has been shown to be determined. Further, in FIG. 13A, as the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit game, when the special figure stop symbol data is “20H”, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 is determined to be “opening pattern 25”. It is shown that when the special figure stop symbol data is "21H", the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 26".

FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23 as the winning opening opening patterns in the jackpot game. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second major winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once in the 1st to 13th rounds, and once in the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th round. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 13C shows the contents of the opening pattern 25 and the opening pattern 26 as the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit game. In the opening pattern 25, the second large winning opening 35 with an opening time of 1.0 second is opened once. In the opening pattern 26, the second large winning opening 35 is opened 5 times and the opening time is 0.3 seconds. That is, in the small hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is not opened, and only the second big winning opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern 25 is the second during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game and after the end of the small hit rush when the "16RV passing big hit" is made by the big hit symbol 1 (20H) of the special figure 2. The start port 21 is held during digestion. The opening pattern 26 is the second starting port during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game and after the end of the small hit rush when the "16RV passing big hit" is made by the big hit symbol 2 (21H) of the special figure 2. 21 holds are made during digestion. That is, the opening pattern 26 is a small hit game performed after the big hit game when the big hit is made via the fluctuation pattern (“P62”) of the dedicated reach (SP5) in which the pseudo big hit suggestion effect described later is performed. It is an open pattern. In other words, the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit game is different between when the jackpot is achieved via the pseudo jackpot suggestion effect and when the jackpot is achieved without going through the pseudo jackpot suggestion effect.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, “20H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33". It is shown that when the stop symbol data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is given. At that time, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..

4. Explanation of big hits, etc. In the game machine 1, there are "big hits", "small hits", and "losses" as a result of the big hit lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the jackpot game (1st jackpot 30 and 2nd jackpot 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) displayed as a stop. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is completed. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. If you win a small hit, a "small hit game" that opens the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is executed with an opening pattern according to the type of big hit that triggered the occurrence of the small hit rush described later. To.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-non-passing scheduled jackpot".
The "V-passing planned jackpot (probability variable jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and is an opening / closing member 32, an opening / closing member 37, and a V opening / closing member. It is a big hit that operates 71. In addition, the "V-passing planned jackpot (probability variable jackpot)" is in a high-probability high-base state from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, and during that period, the second starting port 21 It is a small hit rush period in which small hits occur due to frequent winning. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H, 20H, and 21H correspond to the "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ) Or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game.
The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 It is a big hit that operates the V opening / closing member 71. In addition, in the "V non-passing planned jackpot (normal jackpot)", the game state becomes a low probability low base state after the end of the jackpot game, and it becomes difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 during that period. There is no small hit rush period after the big hit game is over. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region is in the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39.
As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The total number of rounds of "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot" is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "16R (substantial 15R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the jackpot scheduled to pass V (big hit with small hit rush), V. The non-passing jackpot is 60/128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V (big hits with small hit rush), and V non-passing schedules. The jackpot is 45/128 (about 35.2%). In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous to the player.

5. Description of the game state The game state of the game machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variation state)", and the probability fluctuation The uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state when the time is shortened. Judge the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easy to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them. However, in this example, as will be described later, an embodiment in which the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control are executed at the same time is shown.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be a hit is larger in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. In a situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the game is passed to the V region 39 during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 10,000 times. That is, the high-accuracy high-base state actually ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low probability state), a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is this low probability low base state. In addition, although not implemented in this example, there is also a gaming state of a normal probability state (non-high probability state, that is, a low probability state), a time saving state, and a high base state (electric support control state), and this gaming state is particularly "low". It is called a "high probability base state" and a "low probability time saving state" (a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state is called a "specific game state"). In addition, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier for the electric chew 22 to be opened compared to the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, a large number of starting prizes (winning to the second starting port 21) can be obtained, and small hits can be generated frequently, rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. This is because the electric support control is not executed in the low base state, so that the electric chew 22 is harder to open than in the high base state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21. This is because it is easier to win a prize in the first starting port 20 than to win a prize in the second starting port 21. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed in order to win a game ball in the first starting port 20. As a result, a large number of starting prizes (winning to the first starting port 20) can be obtained rather than hitting right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / miss determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / miss predetermination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, the status, the counter, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7 (A). , Ordinary symbol random number value, small hit random number value) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1 and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (FIG. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 includes a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and uses the acquired random number value as the first to first of the normal symbol reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If no game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Fig. 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Fig. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (Fig. 7: label). -TRND-RC value), fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value), small hit random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-K value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reserved storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 hold balls is the number of first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired according to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Here, since the game control microcomputer 81 is in the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used to perform the preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the preliminary determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot determination table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 predetermines the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from random value and fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is pre-determined from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence / absence pre-determination result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1-2". , The variation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the variation pattern "P68" is selected. In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) is set here, the game control microcomputer 81 is included in the jackpot determination table T1 for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”. ”) To determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination processing (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 when the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a normal symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold). The winning random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is not, it is determined to be "missing". (See FIG. 8 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the hit determination (step S505) described above is "missing", the fluctuation display is stopped. (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages of "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a big hit determination, a small hit determination, a fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol change processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a big hit game and a small hit game are executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

In the special operation process, the process related to the first special symbol display 41a and the process related to the second special symbol display 41b are independently executed, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel. It may be configured to allow simultaneous fluctuations. In this case, the processing related to the first special symbol display 41a and the grand prize device (the first grand prize device 31 and the second grand prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is set to the "special figure 1 operation status". Called "1", "2", "3", "4". In addition, the processing related to the second special symbol display 41b and the grand prize device is divided into four stages, and each stage is designated as "1", "2", "3", and "4" in "Special Figure 2 Operation Status". Call. The initial setting of "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not any of the "special figure 1 operation status" and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4". When either "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" or "Special Figure 2 Operation Status" is "4", special electric accessory processing is performed. In the special electric accessory processing, a big hit game and a small hit game are executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special figure 1 is "4", the big hit game by the big hit of the special figure 1 is executed. When the operation status of the special figure 2 is "4", the big hit game or the small hit game by the big hit of the special figure 2 is executed. When neither "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" nor "Special Figure 2 Operation Status" is "4", the game control microcomputer 81 has "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" of "1", "2", or "3". "Is determined. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", the special figure 1 standby process is performed. In the special figure 1 standby process, the hit determination and the fluctuation pattern selection of the special figure 1 are executed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2", the special figure 1 changing process is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation processing, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3", the special figure 1 confirmation process is performed. In the special figure 1 confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. After determining whether the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3", the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" or "2". Judge whether it is "3". When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1", the special figure 2 standby process is performed. In the special figure 2 standby process, the hit determination and the fluctuation pattern selection of the special figure 2 are executed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2", the special figure 2 changing process is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation processing, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 elapses. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3", the special figure 2 confirmation process is performed. In the special figure 2 confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation process of the present embodiment, the standby process, the variable process, and the final process of the special figure 1 and the standby process, the variable process, and the final process of the special figure 2 are executed in parallel. To. On the other hand, the big hit game and the small hit game are executed in preference to the standby processing, the variation processing, and the final processing of the special figures 1 and 2.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1400). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls is “1” or more (step S1400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the small hit determination process (step S1401). In the small hit determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a small hit determination with reference to the small hit determination table T10 (FIG. 8). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first sets the small hit random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. It is read out, and whether or not it is a small hit is determined using the read small hit random value and the small hit determination table T10. Next, when the result of the small hit determination is "small hit", the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the small hit symbol in the buffer of the main RAM 84. , End this process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. Along with shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the small hit determination process (step S1401) and the big hit determination process. Information on the special figure stop symbol data set in (step S1402) and information on the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information on the fluctuation time) are included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random number value group acquired in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. When it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (big hit judgment value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot judgment table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the big hit determination is "missing" (the result of the small hit determination is also "missing"), the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lost symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. Set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1520), and end this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the processing flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1610). When the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the small hit flag is ON (step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the fluctuation pattern by referring to the non-time saving state small hit table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). This is done (step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first sets the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as the table for the non-time saving state small hit, the part corresponding to the small hit (the part where the fluctuation pattern is “P34”) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 is referred to. (The address is set). “P34” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V passage in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing planned jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (in Special Figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P1". The addresses to which the fluctuation patterns "P21" and "P22") are referred to are set in the parts from "P3" to "P3". From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P21" or "P22" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is The address to which the "P4" to "P6" part and the part whose fluctuation pattern is "P23" in Special Figure 2) is referred to is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

In step S1610, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach by using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P7" to The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is “P15” to The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P32” and “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Again, since the variation pattern selected depends on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 is the same as the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processes of steps S1604 to S1611 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605 and S1606. It is different from S1608, S1609, and S1611. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621. , The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in Special FIG. Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern "P61" or "P62" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P61" or "P62" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (special figure). In No. 1, the part where the fluctuation pattern is “P44” to “P46”, and in the special figure 2, the part where the fluctuation pattern is “P63”) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small hit, the portion corresponding to the small hit (the portion of “P74”) in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is referred to. “P74” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

After selecting the fluctuation pattern (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621) as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected fluctuation pattern. (Step S1630) This process is completed. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The contents of the game state management process will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). When the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the big hit game and the small hit game are not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the big hit determination and the small hit determination for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member to the number of rounds according to the type of winning big hit. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening according to the type of the big hit with the winning small hit rush (step S1811). .. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "4" (step S1807), and ends this process.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "10000" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). When "10000" is set in the probability variation counter, the value of the substantial probability variation counter does not become "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, "10000" is set in the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). When "10000" is set in the time reduction counter, the value of the actual time reduction counter does not become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is in the probability change state, the probability change counter value, whether or not it is in the time reduction state, the time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the game machine 1 is always in the low base state in the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are won. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for opening the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2203). As a condition for opening the large winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not there has been a ball in the large winning opening opening start opening 17. If there is no entry into the opening opening opening 17 of the large winning opening, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied. When the ball enters the opening opening opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 further determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the large winning opening. The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening of the big winning opening is temporarily closed after opening, the big winning opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If the above conditions are not satisfied (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When the above conditions are satisfied (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the large winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the big winning opening has been reached. That (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the large winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" is set to "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing schedule". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot", the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to finish this process.

Further, in the special electric accessory processing, in addition to the opening processing of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) in the big hit game as described above, the big winning opening (1st) in the small hit game The opening process of the two major winning openings 35) is also performed. Although not shown, specifically, when the small hit flag is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 has a large winning opening (FIG. 13) according to an opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit with a winning small hit rush. The second large winning opening 35) is opened, and then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening (FIG. 13) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied, the closing condition is satisfied. Close (close) the big prize opening (end of small hit game). After that, the small hit flag is turned off and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether the V opening / closing member 71 is "short opening" or "long opening". This is because sometimes a short release (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that wins the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. It should be noted that the reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened in the case of "long opening" when the second ball is won. ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), the second ball is generally won. The time from time to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), V opening / closing member closing process, and V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, and the present process is completed while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), this process ends as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S2309. On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "10000" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and sets the probability change counter to "10000". The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "10000" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.
In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot is almost a jackpot before the 10,000 jackpot lottery is performed in the high probability high base state. Therefore, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot in the special symbol 2 (via the second start port) in the time saving state and the jackpot scheduled to pass V (special symbol stop symbol data 20H, 21H) is the jackpot game. If V is passed inside, the game state after the big hit becomes a high accuracy and high base state until the next big hit, and it is almost guaranteed that the small hit rush will occur.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the game state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, and 12th round. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Holded ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The variation effect processing is a process for setting a command before the end of variation at a specific timing during the variation effect to execute the specific display effect on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the subRAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the main display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it is being received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is output to the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state or not, whether it is a time saving state, or not, a probability change). The counter, the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-pass command, the sub-RAM 94 holds the V-pass information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In addition to the jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information described above, the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39A, the jackpot determination information “loss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in FIG. The state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the storage area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in Special FIG. 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth reserved in FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information "big hit", the jackpot type information "21H", and the fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas on hold in Special Figure 2 and the areas corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change is completed and the pre-determination information shift process is executed from the state of FIG. 39 (B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 The pre-determination information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command as a “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “loss without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is performed.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random value is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random value is “56 to 67”, the look-ahead effect is as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "miss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108 to 114", the look-ahead effect is used. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the main display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lamps lighting control, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and look-ahead effect on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP2 effect, and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP3 effect. Multiple types of core production patterns that perform SP4 production, multiple types of core production patterns that perform SP5 production (dedicated reach production patterns that perform pseudo jackpot suggestion production described later), and multiple types of core production that perform non-reach loss production A pattern and a plurality of types of core production patterns for performing a small hit effect are set. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P74", the core effect pattern for performing the small hit effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 determines a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation patterns are "P21" to "P34", "P41" to "P56", "P61" to "P74". It may or may not be equipped.

In FIG. 43, as chance-up effect patterns, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", and " 4-NO, "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance production patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

After returning to FIG. 41 and determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and sets the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S501 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable effect is being produced (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect is being produced (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the command before the end of the variation in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command. , The production content is switched and a specific image is displayed according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the notice fade effect for fading the notice image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The buffers and the like that appear in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). When receiving (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads out a predetermined variation effect image instructed by the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Display it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). When receiving (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command before the end of the fluctuation, and when the command before the end of the fluctuation includes the look-ahead effect pattern information, reads a predetermined look-ahead effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the main display device. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Further, even if the command before the end of the fluctuation does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information, if the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the notice fade effect for fading the notice image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When receiving (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variation effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variation effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and reads the predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103 to display the display screen of the main display device 7. Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the present process is terminated.

9. Operation of the panel movable body and the sub display device 10 Using FIGS. 46 to 59, the panel movable body (first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) and the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and The operation of the right sub-display device 10R) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, a left sub display device 10L, and a right sub display device during a game effect (display effect) or in an initial operation when the power is turned on. Drive control is performed to operate the 10R. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

The operation of the left sub-display device 10L will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L. FIG. 47 is an explanatory view illustrating the clockwise rotation of the left sub-display device 10L. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the left sub-display device 10L. The left sub-display device 10L is provided with a rectangular display screen, and is configured to be vertically movable and horizontally rotated. The left sub-display device 10L can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first aspect). At this time, the left sub-display device 10L is located in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, and it is difficult for the player to see a part of the lower left. The left sub-display device 10L moves (advances) upward from the retracted position of FIG. 1, and when it moves to the relay position shown in FIG. 46, it rotates clockwise from that position as shown in FIG. It is possible to move to the indicated advance position (deployment position) and stop there (second aspect). In this second aspect, the left sub-display device 10L stops so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the main display device 7. The left sub-display device 10L is configured to change the orientation of the display screen by 90 degrees between the retracted position in FIG. 1 and the advanced position in FIG. 48. The left sub-display device 10L can be moved (evacuated) from the advanced position of FIG. 48 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) via the states of FIGS. 47 and 46, and is stationary there. Can be done.

The operation of the right sub-display device 10R will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the upward movement of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the left rotation of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the right sub-display device 10R. Like the left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R has a rectangular display screen, and moves up and down and rotates left and right so that the movement mode (movement locus) is line-symmetrical with the left sub display device 10L. Is configured to be possible. The right sub-display device 10R can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first aspect). At this time, the right sub-display device 10R is located in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and it is difficult for the player to see a part of the lower right. When the right sub-display device 10R moves (advances) upward from the retracted position of FIG. 1 and moves to the relay position (relay position) shown in FIG. 49, the right sub-display device 10R rotates counterclockwise from that position as shown in FIG. , It is possible to move to the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 51 and stand still there (second aspect). In this second aspect, the right sub-display device 10R is stopped on the front surface of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the advance position of the right sub-display device 10R and the advance position of the left sub-display device 10L are the same position. However, these advance positions may be different. For example, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R may be adjacent to each other near the center of the display screen 7a when they are in the advanced positions. The right sub-display device 10R is configured so that the orientation of the display screen changes by 90 degrees between the retracted position in FIG. 1 and the advanced position in FIG. The right sub-display device 10R can move (evacuate) from the advanced position of FIG. 51 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) via the states of FIGS. 50 and 49, and is stationary there. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 52, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R can each move upward (relay position) in parallel. Moreover, it is possible to stop at this relay position.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement (advance movement) of the first movable accessory 14 in the advance direction. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 55 is an explanatory view illustrating the rotational operation of the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. 53, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and half of the decorative part with a smiley face drawn on the tip side (left decorative part and right decorative part) is attached. ing. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is at a retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first aspect). At this time, a part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R can be visually recognized. In the first movable accessory 14, as shown in FIG. 53, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other) from the state of FIG. By doing so, at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 54, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are united to form one decorative member (rotating body) (second aspect). In this second aspect, the rotating body in which the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united stops so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the main display device 7. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the rotating body can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise (rotate clockwise in the drawing) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at an arbitrary tilted angle. The first movable accessory 14 can move (evacuate) from the advance position of FIGS. 54 and 55 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) via the state of FIG. 53, and is stationary there. be able to.

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable and horizontally rotationally movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 56 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped on the front surface of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 57, the decorative portion can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise (rotated clockwise in the drawing) in front of the display screen 7a, and can be stopped at an arbitrary tilted angle. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retract) upward from the advance position shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

A combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. 58, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can both perform the first combination effect by being in the second mode. That is, when both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move to the advance position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary in a partially overlapped and combined state. Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are first in a state where the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. It is possible to perform a second combination effect in which the movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are tilted at the same angle. In this second combination effect, after the first combination effect, two movable accessories are formed by rotating (tilting) together, and each of them moves to the advance position in a tilted state and overlaps. In some cases, the second combination effect is directly performed without going through the first combination effect.

10. Production example, effect example, modification example, and mode example of the present embodiment Each effect example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

The sub-display device interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. This sub-display device interlocking effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern (for example, during a pseudo-continuous effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the sub display device interlocking effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 or on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the sub display device interlocking effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R ) Change the position and inclination.

[Sub-display device interlocking effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device interlocking effect A. In the sub-display device interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. The specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG1 represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 is a smiley face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 60B to 60C, the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves in the lower left direction, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves. Moves to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 60B, the specific image TG1 is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 10 displays an image of the portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub display device 10. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 60C, the entire specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears from the right sub display device 10R, and is newly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 is displayed. The specific image TG2 is an image showing the appearance of a specific object, and here, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiley face image. The specific image TG2 is a larger image than the specific image TG1. Here, the specific image TG2 is displayed in the area above the right sub-display device 10R in the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 may be the one in which the specific image TG1 is enlarged and moved while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) moves from the retracted position (home position) to the upper relay position (relay position). Stand still (stop) at the relay position. The specific image TG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered by the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) at the relay position. In other words, the sub display device 10 stands still (stops) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the specific image TG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the specific image TG2 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. That is, the specific image TG 2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), a reduction effect of reducing the specific image TG2 is executed. Here, the specific image TG2 straddles the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 and is reduced and moved downward while maintaining the display, and as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the entire specific image TG2 is It is displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) moves from the relay position (relay position) to the lower retract position (home position). It stands still (stops) at the retracted position. At this time, the specific image TG 2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the specific image TG2 moves upward in the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) when the sub display device 10 is moving downward. After that, in the specific image TG2, the portion of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) protruding from above is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7. That is, the specific image TG 2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 60 (G) to 60 (I), the specific image TG2 does not change its relative position with respect to the main display device 7, and the entire sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10) is used. The state displayed on the 10R) can be switched to the state displayed on the main display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (J), the specific image TG3 is newly displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) in a state where the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7. The specific image TG3 is an image showing the appearance of a specific object, and here, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiley face image.

[Sub-display device interlocking effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device interlocking effect B. FIGS. 61 (A) to 61 (C) of the sub-display device interlocking effect B are the same as those of FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (C) of the sub-display device interlocking effect A. That is, in the sub-display device interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). ing. The specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG1 represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 is a smiley face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61B to 61C, the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves in the lower left direction, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves. Moves to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 61B, the specific image TG1 is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 10 displays an image of the portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub display device 10. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 61C, the entire specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears from the right sub display device 10R, and is newly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 is displayed. The specific image TG2 is an image showing the appearance of a specific object, and here, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiley face image. The specific image TG2 is a larger image than the specific image TG1. Here, the specific image TG2 is displayed in an area near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 may be the one in which the specific image TG1 is enlarged and moved while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61 (E) to 61 (F), the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position). Move to the advance position (deployment position) and stand still (stop) there. The specific image TG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the right sub display device 10R is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) stands still (stops) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the specific image TG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the specific image TG2 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. That is, the specific image TG 2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), a reduction effect of reducing the specific image TG2 is executed. Here, the specific image TG 2 is reduced while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 while maintaining the display, and the entire specific image TG 2 is displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the right sub-display device 10R moves from the advance position (deployment position) to the retracted position (home position) by rotating clockwise and downward, and stands still (stops) at the retracted position. .. At this time, the specific image TG 2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the specific image TG2 moves toward the left side in the right sub display device 10R when the right sub display device 10R is rotating clockwise. After that, in the specific image TG2, the portion protruding from the left side of the right sub-display device 10R is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7. That is, the specific image TG 2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 61 (G) to 61 (I), the specific image TG2 is entirely displayed on the right sub-display device 10R without changing the relative position with respect to the main display device 7. The state is switched to the state in which the whole is displayed on the main display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), the specific image TG3 is newly displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) in a state where the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7. The specific image TG3 is an image showing the appearance of a specific object, and here, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiley face image.

[Sub-display device interlocking effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device interlocking effect C. In the sub-display device interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative symbol forms a reach, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, "5" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol is displayed. 8C is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62 (B) to 62 (C), the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative symbol 8Z1 is an image of a symbol (number) that becomes a big hit when stopped as a middle decorative symbol in the reach effect, and is the same symbol (number) as the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. Here, it is "5". This decorative pattern 8Z1 also corresponds to a specific image because it represents a number as a specific object. The decorative symbol 8Z1 moves in the lower left direction, and moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 62B, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 10 displays an image of the portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub display device 10. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 62C, the entire decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the decorative symbol 8Z1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears from the right sub display device 10R and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. .. The decorative symbol 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is larger than that displayed on the right sub display device 10R. Here, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed in an area near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative symbol 8Z1 may be moved while being enlarged while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62 (E) to 62 (F), the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates clockwise at the relay position (relay position). Move to the advance position (deployment position) and stop (stop) there. The decorative symbol 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the left sub display device 10L is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) stands still (stops) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed. At this time, a part of the decorative symbol 8Z1 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion of the decorative symbol 8Z1 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), a reduction effect of reducing the decorative symbol 8Z1 is executed. Here, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is reduced while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 while maintaining the display, and the entire decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L). At this time, the effect image EF, which is a light emitting image, is displayed around the decorative symbol 8Z1. The effect image EF is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF suggests that "5" of the decorative symbol 8Z1 is confirmed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. In other words, it suggests that the jackpot has been confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployment position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and stands still (stops) at the retracted position. .. At this time, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z1 moves toward the right side in the left sub display device 10L when the left sub display device 10L is rotating counterclockwise. After that, in the decorative symbol 8Z1, the portion protruding from the right side of the left sub display device 10L is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 62 (G) to 62 (I), the decorative symbol 8Z1 is entirely displayed on the left sub display device 10L without changing the relative position with respect to the main display device 7. The state is switched to the state in which the whole is displayed on the main display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (J), "5, 5, 5" are confirmed (stopped) as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the main display device 7. , The left decorative symbol 8ZL, the middle decorative symbol 8ZC, and the right decorative symbol 8ZR are confirmed (stopped) displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R and left sub display device 10L). The decorative symbol 8ZL, the intermediate decorative symbol 8ZC, and the right decorative symbol 8ZR are images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed on the main display device 7, and are confirmed and displayed almost at the same time. To.

[Sub-display device interlocking effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device interlocking effect D. In the sub-display device interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative symbol forms a reach, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, "5" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol is displayed. 8C is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed across both the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10. The decorative symbol 8Z1 is an image of a symbol (number) that becomes a big hit when stopped as a middle decorative symbol in the reach effect, and is the same symbol (number) as the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. Here, it is "5". This decorative pattern 8Z1 also corresponds to a specific image because it represents a number as a specific object. The plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed side by side in an annular shape, and each of them moves along an annular trajectory. Here, it is moving clockwise. A part of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 arranged in a ring shape is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10, and the other part is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative symbol 8Z1 located at the lower right moves in the lower left direction, and moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 63B, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 10 displays an image of the portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub display device 10. To. Similarly, the decorative symbol 8Z1 located below moves to the left and moves from the display screen of the right sub display device 10R to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The decorative symbol 8Z1 located at the lower left moves in the upper left direction, and moves from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, the display of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 disappears, and as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the entire decorative symbol 8Z2 is newly displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the decorative symbol 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is enlarged and displayed while maintaining the display. The decorative symbol 8Z2 may disappear once, and then the enlarged decorative symbol 8Z2 may be redisplayed. Further, the decorative symbol 8Z2 may be one in which one of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 is moved.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63 (E) to 63 (F), the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates clockwise at the relay position (relay position). Move to the advance position (deployment position) and stand still (stop) there. The decorative symbol 8Z2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the left sub display device 10L is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) stands still (stops) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the decorative symbol 8Z2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the decorative symbol 8Z2 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion of the decorative symbol 8Z2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), a reduction effect of reducing the decorative symbol 8Z2 is executed. Here, the decorative symbol 8Z2 is reduced while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 while maintaining the display, and the entire decorative symbol 8Z2 is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L). At this time, the effect image EF, which is a light emitting image, is displayed around the decorative symbol 8Z2. The effect image EF is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF suggests that "5" of the decorative symbol 8Z2 is confirmed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. In other words, it suggests that the jackpot has been confirmed. Further, on the main display device 7, a plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed side by side in a ring shape. Each of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 moves along an annular trajectory. Here, it is moving clockwise. A part of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 arranged in a ring shape is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the other part is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed so as to surround the decorative symbols 8Z2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployment position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and stands still (stops) at the retracted position. .. At this time, the decorative symbol 8Z2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z2 moves toward the right side in the left sub display device 10L when the left sub display device 10L is rotating counterclockwise. After that, in the decorative symbol 8Z2, the portion protruding from the right side of the left sub display device 10L is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 63 (G) to 63 (I), the decorative symbol 8Z2 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L as a whole without changing the relative position with respect to the main display device 7. The state is switched to the state in which the whole is displayed on the main display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (J), "5, 5, 5" are confirmed (stopped) as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the main display device 7. , The left decorative symbol 8ZL, the middle decorative symbol 8ZC, and the right decorative symbol 8ZR are confirmed (stopped) displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R and left sub display device 10L). The decorative symbol 8ZL, the intermediate decorative symbol 8ZC, and the right decorative symbol 8ZR are images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed on the main display device 7, and are confirmed and displayed almost at the same time. To.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the sub-display device interlocking effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 60 (D) to 60 (E), a first effect in which the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and a first effect. After that, the sub display device 10 moves from the first position and stands still (stops) at the second position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the specific image TG2 is displayed. Of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7, the second effect of displaying the image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub display device 10 on the sub display device 10 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 (D) to 61 (F), 62 (D) to 62 (F), and 63 (D) to 63 (F).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (E) to 60 (G), after the second effect, the specific display device 10 and the main display device 7 are displayed straddling the specific display device 1. A third effect in which the image TG2 is reduced and displayed, and a fourth effect in which the entire reduced specific image TG2 is displayed on the sub-display device 10 after the third effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 (F) to 61 (G), 62 (F) to 62 (G), and 63 (F) to 63 (G).
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (G) to 60 (I), the sub display device 10 moves from the second position to the first position after the fourth effect. At the same time, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the entire reduced specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 (G) to 61 (I), 62 (G) to 62 (I), and 63 (G) to 63 (I).
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (B) to 60 (C), when the sub display device 10 is stopped at the first position before the first effect, the sub display device 1 is sub. A sixth effect in which the specific image TG1 is displayed on the display device 10 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 (B) to 61 (C), 62 (B) to 62 (C), and 63 (B).
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 (D) to 61 (F),
The orientation of the sub-display device 10 is different between when the sub-display device 10 is stopped at the first position and when the sub-display device 10 is stopped at the second position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 62 (D) to 62 (F) and 63 (D) to 63 (F).
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, since the specific image is a decorative pattern, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon interlocking effect.
[Modification 1]
In the sub-display device interlocking effect A of FIG. 60, it is assumed that both the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R of the sub-display devices 10 move upward. However, the configuration may be such that only the right sub-display device 10R moves upward and the left sub-display device 10L does not move upward.

[Modification 2]
In the sub-display device interlocking effect B of FIG. 61, the right sub-display device 10R is assumed to move. However, the left sub-display device 10L may be configured to move. In the sub-display device interlocking effect C of FIG. 62 and the sub-display device interlocking effect D of FIG. 63, the left sub-display device 10L is assumed to move. However, the right sub-display device 10R may be configured to move.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the sub-display device interlocking effects A to D of FIGS. 60 to 63 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the sub-display device interlocking effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbols of FIGS. 62 and 63 may be adopted as the specific image.

[Modification 5]
The sub-display device interlocking effects of FIGS. 60 to 63 may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added. For example, the sub-display device interlocking effect of FIGS. 60 to 61 may be executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, and the variable display of the decorative symbol may be displayed.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A first display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine provided with a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
The first display means is configured to be movable.
A first effect in which a specific image representing a specific target is displayed on the second display means, and
After the first effect, the first display means moves from the first position to cover a part of the second display means on which the specific image is displayed. A second display means that stops at a position and displays an image corresponding to a portion of the specific image displayed on the second display means that is covered by the first display means on the first display means. 2 productions and can be performed,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
After the second effect, a third effect in which the specific image displayed straddling the first display means and the second display means is reduced and displayed.
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the entire reduced specific image is displayed on the first display means can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-2.
After the fourth effect, the first display means moves from the second position to the first position, and the second display means displays the entire reduced image. The fifth production is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
Before the first effect, when the first display means is stopped at the first position, a sixth effect in which the specific image is displayed on the first display means can be executed. ,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4.
The orientation of the first display means is different between when the first display means is stopped at the first position and when the first display means is stopped at the second position.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5.
The specific image is a decorative pattern,
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. This decorative symbol variation stop effect can be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol variation stop effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect A. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a high-speed reach display. This reach display is displayed straddling the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a predetermined character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the loss display effect 1 is performed. In this loss display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at 6 symbols in the reach display, and the loss symbol is displayed. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at doublet, the jackpot symbol is obtained, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at other than doublet, the symbol is lost. This lost symbol is displayed straddling the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the loss display effect 2 is performed. In this loss display effect 2, the loss symbol is moved to the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a and displayed. At this time, the lost symbol ZA1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This lost symbol ZA1 is "7 6 7" in the same manner as the lost symbol shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect B. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a high-speed reach display. This reach display is displayed straddling the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a predetermined character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub display device movement effect, the left sub display device 10L moves from the home position to the deployed position, moves to approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the display screen 7a is the left sub. This is an effect displayed on the display device 10L. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the loss display effect 1 is performed. In this loss display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at 6 symbols in the reach display, and the loss symbol is displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at doublet, the jackpot symbol is obtained, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at other than doublet, the symbol is lost. This lost symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the loss display effect 2 is performed. In this loss display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the deployed position to the home position, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, all the lost symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the lost symbol ZA1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This lost symbol ZA1 is "7 6 7" in the same manner as the lost symbol shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect C. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a high-speed reach display. This reach display is displayed straddling the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a predetermined character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub display device movement effect, the left sub display device 10L moves from the home position to the deployed position, moves to approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the display screen 7a is the left sub. This is an effect displayed on the display device 10L. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is performed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at 7 symbols in the reach display, and the jackpot symbol is displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at doublet, the jackpot symbol is obtained, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at other than doublet, the symbol is lost. This jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is performed. In the jackpot display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the deployed position to the home position, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, all of the jackpot symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. The jackpot symbol ZA2 is "7 7 7" like the jackpot symbols shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect D]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect D. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the diagram), and a plurality of other decorative symbols are also displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the diagram), so that the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Reach display is performed. In this case, the decorative symbols representing the 7 symbols are arranged in a circle and move counterclockwise. As shown in the figure, a reach display is formed at a plurality of reach lines LN by a plurality of decorative symbols showing the seven symbols. Further, this reach display is displayed straddling the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R. In this reach effect, a predetermined character performs various effects. The reach line LN is a line for temporarily stopping the decorative symbol to display the reach, and in the case of a big hit, the jackpot symbol is arranged on the reach line LN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub-display device movement effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the deployed position, moves to substantially the center of the display screen 7a, and is a decorative symbol displayed on the display screen 7a during high-speed fluctuation. 8C is an effect displayed on the left sub display device 10L. At this time, the plurality of decorative symbols showing the seven symbols including the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are moving counterclockwise. Further, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has been moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is performed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at 7 symbols in the reach display, and the jackpot symbol is displayed at a plurality of reach lines LN. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at doublet, the jackpot symbol is obtained, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at other than doublet, the symbol is lost. This jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is performed. In the jackpot display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the deployed position to the home position, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, all of the jackpot symbols formed on the plurality of reach lines LN are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. The jackpot symbol ZA2 is "7 7 7" like the jackpot symbols shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.
It should be noted that the above-mentioned decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is performed in the same fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of fluctuations may be performed.

[Modification example]
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, after the lost symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In this case, after the lost symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed on the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R, the lost symbol ZA1 or the symbol ZA2 may be displayed on the display screen 7a.
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, after the left sub display device 10L moves to the front of the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L display the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol. In this case, the display screen 7a may move and move toward the left sub-display device 10L, and the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L may display the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol. Further, both the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L may move, and the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L may display the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol.
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects C and D, when the left sub display device is moved, the left sub display device 10L (for example, on the decorative symbol 8C) displays a button image representing the effect button 63 to the player. The effect button 63 may be prompted to be pressed, and when the effect button 63 is pressed, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Further, the effect button may be displayed on the jackpot symbol, and a predetermined effect (for example, a re-lottery effect for changing the jackpot symbol) may be performed by pressing the effect button 63.
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R may be moved when the lost symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed during the reach effect. For example, the moving decorative symbol may be rotated around the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, when the moving decorative symbol overlaps with the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol ZA2, it may pass behind the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol ZA2.
Further, in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect D, the decorative symbols on the plurality of reach lines LN may be moved when the lost symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed during the reach effect. For example, the moving decorative symbol may be rotated around the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, when the moving decorative symbol overlaps with the jackpot symbol ZA2, it may pass behind the jackpot symbol ZA2.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, after the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R) lose the design or the jackpot symbol (predetermined stop of the decorative symbol). Aspect) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the display effect of the decorative pattern by using the two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect, the same fluctuation is performed. According to this configuration, the effect of displaying the decorative symbol on the display screen 7a and the loss symbol or the jackpot symbol (predetermined stop mode of the decorative symbol) on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R). ) Is displayed as a series of effects, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects C and D, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R). According to this configuration, the interest of the display effect of the jackpot symbol can be improved by using the two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects B to D, at least a part of the symbols forming the jackpot symbol displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L is moved and displayed when the jackpot symbol is formed. According to this configuration, the interest of the display effect of the jackpot symbol can be improved by using the two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, the same decorative symbol (7 symbols) displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L is displayed before the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, during the reach effect). It is moved and displayed. According to this configuration, the interest of the display effect of the jackpot symbol can be improved by using the two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Application example 1]
A gaming machine including a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
Each of the first display means and the second display means can execute a plurality of types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative pattern on the first display means.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the decorative symbol in a predetermined stop mode in the first display means and the second display means.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect in the same variation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 3]
The gaming machine according to the application example 1 or the application example 2.
The predetermined stop mode of the decorative symbol in the second display effect is a mode representing a jackpot symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 4]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 3
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect in which the same symbol as the symbol forming the jackpot symbol in the second display effect is moved and displayed in the first display means and the second display means.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the same decorative symbol is moved and displayed in the first display means and the second display means.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed, the first display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the second display effect is performed after the first display effect. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ When the first jackpot symbol is displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the second jackpot symbol is displayed on either the first display means or the second display means. To.
○ After either one of the first display means or the second display means moves (in front of the other display means), the jackpot symbol is displayed by the first display means and the second display means.
Further, when the moved display means returns to the home position, the second jackpot symbol is displayed.
○ A plurality of jackpot lines are formed by the first display means or the second display means, and a jackpot symbol is displayed on each of them.
○ After displaying the button image on either the first display means or the second display means, the jackpot symbol is displayed by the first display means and the second display means by pushing the button.
○ A plurality of decorative symbols move between the first display means and the second display means. At this time, the plurality of decorative symbols move behind the second jackpot symbol.
○ A button image representing the effect button 63 is displayed on the decorative pattern 8C.

The special variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. This special variation effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the special variation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10. Further, in the special variation effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Special fluctuation production A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 68A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 68C, the zone entry effect is executed. In the zone rush effect, the message image "hot zone rush" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is a production performed during a predetermined period in the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position as shown by the arrow YG2. At this time, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the movement completion effect is executed. This movement completion effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L finishes the movement and stops at the advance position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, fluctuates downward as indicated by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, it is shown that "5", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is stopped on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

[Special fluctuation production B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 69A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the zone entry effect is executed. In the zone rush effect, the message image "hot zone rush" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is a production performed during a predetermined period in the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position as shown by the arrow YG2. At this time, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the movement completion effect is executed. This movement completion effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L finishes the movement and stops at the advance position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, in particular, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed as compared with the effect symbols 8L and 8R of the display screen 7a. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it was shown that "3", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, fluctuates downward as shown by the arrow YG3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, in particular, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed as compared with the effect symbols 8L and 8R of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that "5", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is stopped on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

[Special fluctuation production C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 70A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the zone entry effect is executed. In the zone rush effect, the message image "hot zone rush" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is a production performed during a predetermined period in the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70 (D) to 70 (H), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. In this medium symbol variation effect, the medium effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is variably displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has been moved to the advance position. It is a production to do.

First, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while moving downward as shown by the arrow YG1. Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, moves downward as shown by the arrow YG2, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed across the display screen of. Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L while moving downward as shown by the arrow YG3. Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, moves downward as shown by the arrow YG4, and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the main display device 7 It is displayed across the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), "3", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display screen 7 while moving downward as shown by YG5.

[Special fluctuation production D]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIGS. 71 (C) and 71 (D), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This medium symbol variation effect is an effect of variablely displaying the medium effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, it is shown that "3", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, fluctuates downward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1. Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, moves downward as shown by the arrow YG2. At this time, the left sub display device 10L is in the retracted position, and the middle effect symbol 8C is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, the final stop effect (loss) shown in FIG. 71 (E) is executed. This fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both set to "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is set to "4".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the special fluctuation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variation display of the middle effect symbol 8C among the variation displays of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. (FIGS. 68 (G), 69 (G), 70 (D) to (H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L is moved so as to overlap the middle effect symbol 8C which is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a (FIGS. 68 (D), (E), (F), and FIG. 69 (D). ) (E) (F)), the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C is performed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIGS. 68 (G), 69 (G), 70 (D) to (H)). ). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect symbol 8C in one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R having three rows is variably displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the effect symbols in a specific row, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the middle symbol variation effect, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and straddles the display screen 7a and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Is displayed, and is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. After being displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the zone entry effect is executed (FIGS. 68 (C), 69 (C), 70 (C)), the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This is done on the display screen of. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a wide range to the zone production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the medium effect symbol 8C displayed on the left sub display device 10L can be displayed larger than the effect symbols 8L and 8R of the display device 7a (FIGS. 69 (G) (H). )). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the special variation effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect using the left sub display device 10L has been used, but in addition to or in place of the left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R may be used to display the middle effect symbol 8C. ..
[Modification 2]
In the above, the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, but two or more rows of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. It may be displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
[Modification 3]
In the above, when the zone entry effect is executed (FIGS. 68 (C), 69 (C), 70 (C)), the left sub-display device 10L is used to display the variation of the middle effect symbol 8C. However, when the zone rush effect is executed, the variation display of the middle effect symbol 8C using the left sub display device 10L and the variation display of the middle effect symbol 8C using the left sub display device 10L are performed. If not (FIG. 71), the branch may be made.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A3-1]
The first display device that can display the variable display of the production pattern and
A game machine including a second display device different from the first display device.
It is characterized in that the variation display of the effect symbols in a predetermined row among the variation displays of the effect symbols performed on the display screen of the first display device can be performed on the display screen of the second display device. Game machine.

[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1.
The second display device is a gaming machine characterized in that it moves so as to overlap with the effect symbols in the predetermined row of the first display device, and displays a variable display of the effect symbols of the predetermined example.

[Aspect A3-3]
A game machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2.
The game machine characterized in that the effect symbol in the predetermined row is an effect symbol in any one row of the effect symbols in a plurality of rows.

[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3.
The effect symbols in the predetermined row are displayed on one of the display screens of the first display device and the second display device during the fluctuation, and then straddle the display screens of the first display device and the second display device. A game machine characterized by being displayed on the other display screen.

[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display of the effect symbols in the predetermined row is performed on the display screen of the second display device when a specific effect is executed.

[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the second display device is larger than the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect A3-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that, even when the specific effect is executed, the variable display of the effect symbols in the predetermined row may not be performed on the display screen of the second display device.

The character display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. This character display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Character display effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A.
In the character display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the character display effect 1 is performed. In the character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a friendly character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the character display effect 2 is performed. In this character display effect 2, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L and then moved to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the character display effect 3 is performed. In the character display effect 3, the character CRA is displayed by returning to the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.
After this, a reach production is performed.

[Character display effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the character display effect 1 is performed. In the character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a friendly character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73C, the character display effect 2 is performed. In the character display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (the place where the character CRA is displayed in the character display effect 1), and the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a. Is an effect displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. The hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has been moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the character display effect 3 is performed. In the character display effect 3, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the deployed position to the home position, and the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a.
After this, a reach production is performed.

[Character display effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect C.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the character display effect 1 is performed. In the character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a friendly character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the character display effect 2 is performed. In the character display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (the place where the character CRA is displayed in the character display effect 1), and the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. Further, in the character display effect 2, the character focus image ZB1 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This character focus image ZB1 is an image for emphasizing the character CRA, which is displayed in a portion other than the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L. For example, a plurality of speed lines are represented from the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L. It is an image that represents a predetermined emblem or the like. The character focus image ZB1 may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 in a portion of the left sub-display device 10L excluding the character CRA. Further, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has been moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the character display effect 3 is performed. In this character display effect 3, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the deployed position to the home position, the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a, and the character focus image ZB1 of the illumination panel 18 is erased to that portion. Is transparent. The hold icon 9A is displayed by returning to the left sub-display device 10L again.
After this, a reach production is performed.

[Character display effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect D.
In the character display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), the character display effect 1 is performed. In the character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a friendly character.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75 (C) and 75 (D), the character display effect 2 and the character display effect 3 are performed. That is, in the character display effects 2 and 3, the left sub-display device 10L is driven toward the expansion position (near the center of the display screen 7a on which the character CRA is displayed) to the position of the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a. When it comes, while gradually hiding the character CRA of the display screen 7a, the image corresponding to the hidden part of the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), the character display effect 4 is performed. In the character display effect 4, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (the place where the character CRA is displayed in the character display effect 1), and the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. Further, in the character display effect 2, the character focus image ZB1 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This character focus image ZB1 is an image for emphasizing the character CRA, which is displayed in a portion other than the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L. For example, a plurality of speed lines are represented from the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L. It is an image that represents a predetermined emblem or the like. The character focus image ZB1 may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 in a portion of the left sub-display device 10L excluding the character CRA. Further, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has been moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the character display effect 5 is performed. In this character display effect 5, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the deployed position to the home position, the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a, and the character focus image ZB1 of the illumination panel 18 is erased to that portion. Is transparent. The hold icon 9A is displayed by returning to the left sub display device 10L again.
After this, a reach production is performed.

[Modification example]
In the character display effects C and D, when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the position of the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L sequentially starts from the area on the front side of the character CRA. The character CRA is displayed. On the other hand, when the left sub-display device 10L hides all the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, the character CRA may be displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

The character display effect is performed with the same variation. However, the variation is not limited to this, and may be performed with different variations.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the character display effect, after the character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R). According to this configuration, the interest of the character display effect can be improved by using the two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the character display effect, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and the left sub display device 10L is located in front of the center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a on the left sub display device 10L. The character CRA is displayed at a position corresponding to the displayed character CRA. According to this configuration, the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as if it has been moved to the left sub-display device 10L located in front of the display screen 7a, so that a three-dimensional display effect can be obtained. Is possible. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above character display effect, the left sub display device 10L moves from the home position to the unfolded position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the left sub display device 10L is in the unfolded position. The character CRA is displayed at a position corresponding to the character CRA displayed on 7a. According to this configuration, the left sub-display device 10L moves, and the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as if it has moved to the left sub-display device 10L located in front of the display screen 7a. It is possible to create a lively and three-dimensional display effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the character display effect, when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the deployed position, the left sub-display device 10L rotates (moves to the right) with respect to a predetermined axis (see FIG. 47). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a display effect with a more dynamic and three-dimensional effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the character display effects C and D, the character CRA is moved from the display screen 7a to the left sub display device 10L and displayed. In that case, the portion of the illumination panel 18 corresponding to the left sub display device 10L (left sub display device). A character focus image ZB1 which is an image different from the character CRA is displayed in a portion different from the portion corresponding to the character CRA displayed on the 10L. According to this configuration, the presence of the character CRA can be enhanced, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a more dynamic and three-dimensional effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZB-1]
A gaming machine including a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
Each of the first display means and the second display means can execute a plurality of types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the first display means.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the predetermined image on the second display means.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZB-1.
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the predetermined image is displayed at the first position of the first display means, and in the second display effect, the second display means is the second display means. A third position corresponding to the first position of the first display means in the second display means in a state of being in a second position which is a position in front of the first position of the display means 1. Display the predetermined image at the position,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZB-2.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the second display means moves from the state where the second display means is in the fourth position to the second position, and the second display means moves to the second position. In a certain state, the predetermined image is displayed at the third position in the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZB-3.
In the combination effect, when the second display means moves to the second position in the second display effect, the second display means rotates and moves with respect to a predetermined axis.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZB-3 or the aspect ZB-4.
A third display means different from the first display means and the second display means is provided.
The third display means is arranged in front of the first display means and the second display means.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is the second display effect in the third display means when the predetermined image is displayed at the third position of the second display means in the second display effect. An image different from the predetermined image is displayed in a portion different from the portion corresponding to the predetermined image displayed on the display means of the above.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ When the second display means moves to the position of the predetermined image of the first display means, the predetermined image is sequentially displayed from the area in front of the predetermined image.
○ Predetermined images are sequentially displayed in the second display means, and finally all predetermined images are displayed.

The selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. This selection effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the selection effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device 7 The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the above and the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the selection effect, the position of the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R). And change the tilt.

[Selection production A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect A. In the selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative symbol forms a reach, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, "5" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol is displayed. 8C is displayed in a variable manner. Here, a selection effect of selecting one symbol from the candidates of a plurality of symbols (numbers) finally selected as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment, one of the three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5" is selected. An example of an effect in which one symbol is selected. The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIGS. 76 (A) to 76 (F) of this embodiment suggest that a selection effect in which one symbol is selected from the three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5" is started. It corresponds to the selection production start production. Then, FIG. 76 (H) notifies that the symbol "4" is selected from the three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5", and corresponds to the selection determination effect. FIGS. 76 (I) to 76 (J) notify that the symbol "5" has been selected from the three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5", which is also used for the selection decision effect. Applicable.

In FIG. 76A, the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 representing “3” is temporarily stopped and displayed at the position where the intermediate decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIGS. 76 (B) to 76 (C), the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 representing “4” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 It overlaps with and a temporary stop is displayed. The second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 displayed here is larger than the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1, and the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 is formed by overlapping the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 in front of the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1. It becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76 (D) to 76 (E), the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 representing "5" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 Overlaps on. The third intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 displayed here is larger than the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1, and the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 is formed by overlapping the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 in front of the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2. It becomes difficult to see. After that, the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 representing "3" larger than the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3. Next, the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2, which is larger than the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1, moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1. In this way, the effect of covering the intermediate decorative pattern in which the large intermediate decorative symbols are currently temporarily stopped is repeated and the effect speed is increased, and as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the replacement of the intermediate decorative symbols is visually recognized. Difficult high-speed production display is made. In the production of FIGS. 76 (A) to 76 (F), three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5" are displayed one by one in order, and one of these symbols is selected. It is possible to notify the player that the production will be started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND appear on the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The button image BTN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation validity period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including the characters "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect is executed in which one of the three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5" is selected and determined. Here, the selection decision notifies the player of the selected symbol by stopping (temporarily stopping or confirming stop) the selected symbol at the display position of the intermediate decorative symbol.

In FIG. 76 (H), the second middle decorative symbol 8C2 representing “4” is stopped, and it is notified that the symbol “4” is selected from the three types of symbols “3”, “4”, and “5”. ing. In FIG. 76 (J), the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 representing “5” is stopped, and it is notified that the symbol “5” is selected from the three types of symbols “3”, “4”, and “5”. ing. As shown in FIG. 76 (H), the second middle decorative symbol 8C2 representing “4” is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 on which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. (Stop display) is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 representing “5” is displayed (stop display) on the right sub display device 10R of the advance position (deployment position) covering the predetermined position of the display screen 7a. ). Specifically, when the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 representing "5" is stopped, the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 as shown in FIG. 76 (I). At the same time, the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and stand still (stop) there. The advance position (deployment position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3, which is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, is partially covered when the right sub display device 10R is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the right sub-display device 10R stands still (stops) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed. At this time, a part of the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. In other words, the right sub-display device 10R displays an image corresponding to the portion of the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the right sub-display device 10R. That is, the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the right sub display device 10R, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases. The second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 and the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 are displayed at substantially the same positions with respect to the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), the entire third middle decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R of the advance position (deployment position). In FIG. 76 (I), the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the right sub display device 10R is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 until the right sub display device 10R is positioned at the advance position (deployment position). The mode may be displayed on the display device 10R. In this way, it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected by changing the display device according to the type (number) of the image (design) finally selected as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. It can be done and the interest can be improved. Here, when the third middle decorative symbol 8C3 representing the jackpot “5” is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that the player can be given a special feeling.

[Selection effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect B. In the selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 77A, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). This selection effect B is executed during the variation effect. Here, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol, a selection effect of selecting one image from a plurality of images showing the jackpot lottery result for the variation is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment, one of three types of images "loss", "big hit", and "reach" is selected. Illustrate an effect in which one image is selected. Here, after the selection effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or stopped and displayed so as to have a result corresponding to the selected image. That is, when the "missing" image is selected in the selection effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the losing mode (for example, "456"). When the image of "big hit" is selected in the selection effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit (for example, "777"). When the "reach" image is selected in the selection effect, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the reach mode (for example, "5 ↓ 5"). In other words, after the selection effect, the effect (big hit display, loss display, reach display) corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIGS. 77 (A) to 77 (F) of this embodiment suggest that a selection effect in which one image is selected from the three types of images "miss", "big hit", and "reach" is started. It corresponds to the selection production start production. Then, FIG. 77 (H) notifies that "loss" is selected from the three types of images "loss", "big hit", and "reach", and corresponds to the selection decision effect. FIGS. 77 (I) to 77 (J) notify that "big hit" has been selected from the three types of images "miss", "big hit", and "reach", which also corresponds to the selection decision effect. To do.

In FIG. 77 (A), the first image SG1 representing “loss” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIGS. 77 (B) to 77 (C), the second image SG2 representing the "big hit" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, overlaps with the first image SG1 and stops. Is displayed. The second image SG2 displayed here is an image having the same size and shape as the first image SG1, and the first image SG1 is difficult to see because the second image SG2 overlaps in front of the first image SG1. Become in a state.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77 (D) to 77 (E), the third image SG3 representing "reach" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the second image SG2. The third image SG3 displayed here is an image having the same size and shape as the second image SG2, and the second image SG2 is difficult to see because the third image SG3 overlaps in front of the second image SG2. Become in a state. After that, the first image SG1 having the same size and shape as the third image SG3 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the third image SG3. Next, the second image SG2 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the first image SG1. In this way, the effect of covering the images in which the first to third images are currently temporarily stopped is repeated and the effect speed becomes faster, and as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the high-speed effect in which it is difficult to visually replace the images. The display SG is made. In the production of FIGS. 77 (A) to 77 (F), three types of images "loss", "big hit", and "reach" are displayed one by one in order, and one of these images is selected. It is possible to notify the player that the production will be started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), the high-speed effect display SG disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation validity period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including the characters "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect is executed in which one image is selected and determined from the three types of images "loss", "big hit", and "reach". Here, the selection decision notifies the player of the selected image by stopping and displaying only the selected image at the display position.

In FIG. 77 (H), the first image SG1 representing “loss” is stopped, and it is notified that “loss” is selected from the three types of images “loss”, “big hit”, and “reach”. In FIG. 77 (J), the second image SG2 representing the “big hit” is stopped, and it is notified that the “big hit” is selected from the three types of images “miss”, “big hit”, and “reach”. As shown in FIG. 77 (H), the first image SG1 representing “loss” is displayed (stopped) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77 (J), the second image SG2 representing the “big hit” is displayed (stopped) on the right sub-display device 10R of the relay position (relay position) covering the predetermined position of the display screen 7a. To. Specifically, when the second image SG2 representing the "big hit" is stopped, the second image SG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the sub display is displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (I). The device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) moves from the retracted position (home position) to the upper relay position (relay position), and stands still (stops) at the relay position. The relay position (relay position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The second image SG2, which is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, is partially covered by the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) at the relay position. In other words, the sub display device 10 is stationary (stopped) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the second image SG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the second image SG2 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion of the second image SG2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. That is, the second image SG2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases. The first image SG1 and the second image SG2 are displayed at substantially the same position with respect to the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (J), the entire second image SG2 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R of the relay position (relay position). In FIG. 77 (I), the second image SG2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the right sub display device 10R is located at the relay position (relay position) for the first time. It may be the mode displayed on 10R. In this way, by changing the display device according to the type of image finally selected as the jackpot lottery result, it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected, and to improve the interest. be able to. Here, when the second image SG2 representing the “big hit” is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that the player can be given a special feeling.

[Selection effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect C. In the selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 78A, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). This selection effect C is executed during the jackpot game. Here, during the jackpot game, a selection effect of selecting one image from a plurality of images showing the game state after the jackpot game is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment, one image is selected from the two types of images "probability variation" and "time reduction". Illustrate the selected effect. Here, when the jackpot game is completed after the selection effect, the game state corresponding to the selected image is set. That is, when the "probability change" image is selected in the selection effect, the probability change state (high probability high base state) is set after the jackpot game. When the "time saving" image is selected in the selection effect, the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) is set after the big hit game. In other words, after the selection effect, when the jackpot game is completed, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect (probability variation effect, time saving effect) is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIGS. 78 (A) to 78 (F) of this embodiment suggest that a selection effect in which one image is selected from the two types of images "probability variation" and "time reduction" is started. Corresponds to the selection effect start effect. Then, FIG. 78 (H) notifies that "time reduction" has been selected from the two types of images "probability variation" and "time reduction", and corresponds to the selection determination effect. FIGS. 78 (I) to 78 (J) notify that "probability change" is selected from the two types of images "probability change" and "time reduction", which also corresponds to the selection determination effect.

In FIG. 78A, the first image SG1 representing “probability change” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIGS. 78 (B) to 78 (C), the second image SG2 representing "time reduction" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, overlaps with the first image SG1 and stops. Is displayed. The second image SG2 displayed here is larger than the first image SG1, and the second image SG2 overlaps the front of the first image SG1 so that the first image SG1 is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78 (D) to 78 (E), the first image SG1 representing "probability change" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the second image SG2. The first image SG1 displayed here is larger than the second image SG2, and the first image SG1 overlaps the front of the second image SG2, so that the second image SG2 becomes difficult to see. After that, the second image SG2, which is larger than the first image SG1, moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and covers the first image SG1. Next, the first image SG1 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the second image SG2. In this way, the effect of covering the images in which the first and second images are currently temporarily stopped is repeated and the effect speed becomes faster, and as shown in FIG. 78 (F), the high-speed effect in which it is difficult to visually replace the images. The display SG is made. In the effects of FIGS. 78 (A) to 78 (F), two types of images "probability change" and "time reduction" are displayed one by one in order, and a selection effect in which one image is selected from these is started. It is possible to notify the player that the image will be played. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the high-speed effect display SG disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation validity period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including the characters "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect is executed in which one image is selected and determined from the two types of images "probability change" and "time reduction". Here, the selection decision notifies the player of the selected image by stopping and displaying only the selected image at the display position.

In FIG. 78 (H), the second image SG2 representing the “time reduction” is stopped, and it is notified that the “time reduction” is selected from the two types of images “probability variation” and “time reduction”. In FIG. 78 (J), the first image SG1 representing the “probability change” is stopped, and it is notified that the “probability change” is selected from the two types of images “probability change” and “time reduction”. As shown in FIG. 78 (H), the second image SG2 representing the “time saving” is displayed (stopped) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78 (J), the first image SG1 representing the “probability change” is displayed (stopped) on the right sub-display device 10R of the advance position (expanded position). Specifically, when the first image SG1 representing "probability change" is stopped, as shown in FIG. 78 (I), the first image SG1 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and stop (stop) there. The advance position (deployment position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (J), the first image SG1 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R of the advance position (deployment position). An effect image EF, which is a light emitting image, is displayed around the first image SG1. The effect image EF is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF notifies that the "probability change" of the first image SG1 has been confirmed. In FIG. 78 (I), the first image SG1 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In this way, by changing the display device according to the type of image finally selected as the game state after the jackpot game, it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected, which is a hobby. It can be improved. Here, when the first image SG1 representing "probability change" is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that a special feeling can be given to the player. The second image SG2 and the first image SG1 are displayed at substantially the same position with respect to the main display device 7.

[Selection effect D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect D. In the selection effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). This selection effect D is executed during the variation effect of the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). Here, during the variation effect of the probability variation state, a selection effect of selecting one image from a plurality of images showing the lottery result for the variation is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment, the three types of images "fall", "continuation", and "big hit" are selected. An example of an effect in which one image is selected. Here, after the selection effect, the game state corresponding to the selected image is set. That is, when the "falling" image is selected in the selection effect, the normal state (low accuracy and low base state) is subsequently set. When the "continue" image is selected in the selection effect, the probability change state (high accuracy and high base state) continues as it is. When the image of "big hit" is selected in the selection effect, the big hit game is executed. In other words, after the selection effect, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect (normal state effect, time saving state effect, jackpot game effect) is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIGS. 79 (A) to 79 (F) of this embodiment suggest that a selection effect in which one image is selected from the three types of images "fall", "continuation", and "great hit" is started. It corresponds to the selection production start production. Then, FIG. 79 (H) notifies that "fall" has been selected from the three types of images "fall", "continuation", and "great hit", and corresponds to the selection decision effect. FIGS. 79 (I) to 79 (J) notify that "big hit" is selected from the three types of images "fall", "continue", and "big hit", and this is also a selection decision effect. Corresponds to.

In FIG. 79 (A), the left symbol LS, the right symbol RS, and the first middle symbol CS1 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left symbol LS and the right symbol RS are images represented as "falling" and are temporarily stopped. The first middle symbol CS1 is an image represented as "falling", and is temporarily stopped and displayed between the left symbol LS and the right symbol RS. Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (B) to 79 (C), the second middle symbol CS2 representing “continuation” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the first middle symbol CS1. Is stopped and displayed. The second middle symbol CS2 displayed here is larger than the first middle symbol CS1, and the second middle symbol CS2 overlaps in front of the first middle symbol CS1 so that the first middle symbol CS1 is difficult to see. Become.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (D) to 79 (E), the third middle symbol CS3 representing the “big hit” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and moves to the second middle symbol CS2. Overlap. The third middle symbol CS3 displayed here is larger than the second middle symbol CS2, and the third middle symbol CS3 overlaps in front of the second middle symbol CS2, so that the second middle symbol CS2 is difficult to see. Become. After that, the first middle symbol CS1 larger than the third middle symbol CS3 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the third middle symbol CS3. Next, the second middle symbol CS2 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the first middle symbol CS1. In this way, the effect of covering the middle symbols in which the first to third middle symbols are currently temporarily stopped is repeated and the effect speed becomes faster, and as shown in FIG. 79 (F), it is difficult to visually recognize the replacement of the middle symbols. High-speed production display CS is made. In the production of FIGS. 79 (A) to 79 (F), three types of images "fall", "continuation", and "big hit" are displayed one by one in order, and one of these images is selected. It is possible to notify the player that the selection effect is started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), the high-speed effect display CS disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation validity period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including the characters "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect is executed in which one image is selected and determined from the three types of images "fall", "continue", and "big hit". Here, the selection decision notifies the player of the selected image by stopping and displaying only the selected image at the display position.

In FIG. 79 (H), the first middle symbol CS1 representing “fall” is stopped, and it is notified that “fall” is selected from the three types of images “fall”, “continue”, and “big hit”. There is. In FIG. 79 (J), the third middle symbol CS3 representing the “big hit” is stopped, and it is notified that the “big hit” is selected from the three types of images “fall”, “continue”, and “big hit”. doing. As shown in FIG. 79 (H), the first middle symbol CS1 representing “fall” is displayed (stopped) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79 (J), the third middle symbol CS3 representing the “big hit” is displayed (stopped) on the right sub display device 10R of the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, when the third middle symbol CS3 representing "great hit" is stopped, the third middle symbol CS3 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 79 (I). In this state, the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and stand still (stop) there. .. The advance position (deployment position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (J), the third middle symbol CS3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R of the advance position (deployment position). An effect image EF, which is a light emitting image, is displayed around the third middle symbol CS3. The effect image EF is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF notifies that the "big hit" of the third middle symbol CS3 has been confirmed. In FIG. 79 (I), the third middle symbol CS3 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In this way, by changing the display device according to the type of image that is finally selected during the variation effect of the probability change state (high accuracy and high base state), a special feeling when a specific image is selected is produced. It is possible to improve the interest. Here, when the third middle symbol CS3 representing "big hit" is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that the player can be given a special feeling. The first middle symbol CS1 and the third middle symbol CS3 are displayed at substantially the same position with respect to the main display device 7.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents by using the sub display device 10 and the main display device 7. It is possible to execute the selection effect to be performed. In the selection effect of FIG. 76, when the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3, which is one of the plurality of types of images, is selected, the selected third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed on the sub display device 10, and a plurality of types are displayed. When the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2, which is one of the images of the above, is selected, the selected second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 is displayed on the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 77 (H) to (J), 78 (H) to (J), and 79 (H) to (J).
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, the sub display device 10 is configured to be movable, and the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is selected in the selection effect of FIG. 76. In this case, the sub-display device 10 moves from the first position to the second position, and the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed at the second position (FIG. 76 (J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 77 (J), 78 (J), and 79 (J).
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when the second middle decoration symbol 8C2 is selected in the selection effect, the second middle decoration is placed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. When the symbol 8C2 is displayed and the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is selected, the sub display device 10 stops at the advanced position covering the predetermined position of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is stopped. It is displayed (Fig. 76 (J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 77 (J), 78 (J), and 79 (J).
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 76 (A) to 76 (F), 77 (A) to 77 (F), 78 (A) to 78 (F), 79 (A). As shown in FIG. 79 (F), in the selection effect, one image is selected from a plurality of types of images after the selection start suggestion effect suggesting that the selection effect is started and the selection start suggestion effect. In the selection start suggestion effect, a plurality of types of images are sequentially displayed one by one on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 76 (A) to 76 (F), 77 (A) to 77 (F), 78 (A) to 78 (F), and 79 (A). As shown in FIG. 79 (F), in the selection start suggestion effect, when a plurality of types of images are displayed one by one on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the first image is displayed. After that, a second image larger than the first image is displayed at a position covering the first image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an effect button 63 that can be operated by the player, and FIGS. 76 (G) to 76 (J), 77 (G) to 77 (J), and 78 (FIG. 78). As shown in FIGS. 78 (J) to 78 (J) and 79 (G) to 79 (J), when the effect button 63 is operated after the selection start effect, the selection decision effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, a plurality of types of images are associated with one of the plurality of types of effects executed after the selection effect, and the selection effect After that, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the selection effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the selection effect A of FIG. 76, the selection effect C of FIG. 78, and the selection effect D of FIG. 79, the right sub-display device 10R is assumed to move. However, the left sub-display device 10L may be configured to move.

[Modification 2]
In the selection effect B of FIG. 77, it is assumed that both the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R of the sub-display devices 10 move upward. However, the configuration may be such that only the right sub-display device 10R moves upward and the left sub-display device 10L does not move upward.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the selection effects A to D of FIGS. 76 to 79 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the selection effect C of FIG. 78, the left symbol LS and the right symbol RS may be displayed on both sides of the first image SG1 and the second image SG2 as in the selection effect D of FIG. 79.

[Modification 5]
In each of the selected effects A to D of FIGS. 76 to 79, a part of the described effects may not be provided, or other effects may be added. For example, in the selection effect D of FIG. 79, when the second middle symbol CS2 is selected, the second middle symbol CS2 may be displayed on the right sub display device 10R of the advance position, or the display screen of the main display device 7. It may be displayed on 7a. Further, the second middle symbol CS2 may be randomly displayed on the right sub-display device 10R at the advanced position, or may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A5-1]
The first display means capable of displaying an image and
A gaming machine provided with a second display means capable of displaying an image.
By using the first display means and the second display means, it is possible to execute a selection effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents.
In the selection effect
When the first image, which is one of the plurality of types of images, is selected, the selected first image is displayed in the first display means.
When the second image, which is one of the plurality of types of images, is selected, the selected second image is displayed in the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-1.
The first display means is configured to be movable.
In the selection effect
When the first image is selected, the first display means moves from the first position to the second position, and the first image is displayed at the second position.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-2.
In the selection effect
When the second image is selected, the second image is displayed at a predetermined position in the second display means, and the second image is displayed.
When the first image is selected, the first display means stops at a second position covering the predetermined position of the second display means, and the first image is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3.
The selection effect is
The selection start suggestion effect suggesting that the selection effect is started, and the selection start suggestion effect.
After the selection start suggestion effect, a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images is included.
In the selection start suggestion effect, the plurality of types of images are displayed one by one in order in the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4.
In the selection start suggestion effect,
In the second display means, when the plurality of types of images are displayed one by one in order, after the first image is displayed, a second image larger than the first image is displayed. Displayed in a position that covers the first image,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4 or aspect A5-5 is further described.
It is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player.
When the operating means is operated after the selection start effect, the selection determination effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6.
The plurality of types of images are associated with one of the plurality of types of effects executed after the selection effect.
After the selection effect, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, a plurality of image pseudo-continuous effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. This multi-image pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Multiple image pseudo-continuous production A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of image pseudo-continuous production A. In the plurality of image pseudo continuous effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo-continuous effect. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), a pseudo-continuous production is performed. In this pseudo-continuous production, the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed over the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R. This pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed over the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multiple image pseudo-continuous production B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of image pseudo continuous effect B. In the plurality of image pseudo continuous effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo-continuous effect. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the pseudo continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L, and the pseudo continuous image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. This pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the pseudo-continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed over the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multiple image pseudo-continuous production C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of image pseudo-continuous production C. In the plurality of image pseudo continuous effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo-continuous effect. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), a pseudo-continuous production is performed. In this pseudo-continuous production, the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, the pseudo-continuous image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC4. Is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the pseudo-continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is an image of a star pattern, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 displayed on the display screen 7a, the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device on the illumination panel 18. It is displayed in an area other than the area (part) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous image ZC3 displayed on the 10R. In this case, in the illumination panel 18, the region corresponding to the pseudo-continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3 is a transparent transparent region. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed over the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multiple image pseudo-continuous production D]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of image pseudo-continuous production D. In the plurality of image pseudo continuous effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo-continuous effect. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), a pseudo-continuous production is performed. In this pseudo-continuous production, the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a (near the expansion position of the left sub-display device 10L), the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC3 Is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the pseudo-continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is an image of a star pattern, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 displayed on the display screen 7a, the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device on the illumination panel 18. It is displayed in an area other than the area (part) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous image ZC3 displayed on the 10R. In this case, in the illumination panel 18, the region corresponding to the pseudo-continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3 is a transparent transparent region. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed over the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, the button image ZC5 is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo continuous image ZC1 on the display screen 7a. This button image ZC5 is an image representing the effect button 63, and is an image for urging the player to press the effect button 63. Further, in this button display effect, in the illumination panel 18, the area corresponding to the button image ZC5 of the display screen 7a is a transparent area. In other words, in the illumination panel 18, the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is displayed in an area other than the area corresponding to the pseudo-continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, ZC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this sub-display device movement effect, when the effect button 63 is pressed (button pushed) by the player who has seen the button image ZC5, the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the home position to the deployed position. A part of the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. That is, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L. In this case, the pseudo continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has been erased. Further, in the illumination panel 18, the region corresponding to the left sub-display device 10L is a transmission region. In other words, in the illumination panel 18, the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is displayed in an area other than the area corresponding to the pseudo-continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and the left sub-display device 10L. That is, in this sub-display device movement effect, the button image ZC5 is displayed on the pseudo-continuous image ZC2, and when the effect button 63 is pressed, the left sub-display device 10L moves and the left sub-display device 10L has a pseudo-continuous image. When ZC1 is displayed, a pseudo-continuous effect or an effect suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

The above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-continuous production is performed with the same variation. However, it may be done with different fluctuations.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-continuous production, the pseudo-continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and ZC4 are images constituting the pseudo-continuous production, but the pseudo-continuous production is continued or the pseudo-continuous production is performed. It may contain suggestions.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the multiple image pseudo continuous effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the plurality of image pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed by using the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a dynamic pseudo-continuous production using two display devices, so that the interest of the game can be improved.
In the multiple image pseudo-continuous effect D, the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the expanded position in the sub-display device movement effect, but the pseudo-continuous image other than the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 (for example, , Pseudo-continuous image ZC2 or a new pseudo-continuous image) may be displayed.
In the plurality of image pseudo-continuous effect D, the button image ZC5 is displayed on the display screen 7a in the button display effect, but is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, on the pseudo-continuous image) of the sub display device 10 or the illumination panel 18. You may.

[Effect 2]
In the multiple image pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 capable of configuring the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC2, ZC3, which can configure the pseudo-continuous effect on the sub-display device 10 or the illumination panel 18. ZC4 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to display a pseudo-continuous image on each of two or more display devices to perform a dynamic pseudo-continuous effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned image pseudo-continuous effect, the sub-display device 10 or the illumination panel 18 on which the pseudo-continuous images ZC2, ZC3, and ZC4 that can form the pseudo-continuous effect are displayed, the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 that can configure the pseudo-continuous effect is It is arranged on the front side of the displayed display screen 7a. According to this configuration, two pseudo-continuous images can be expressed three-dimensionally, and a three-dimensional and dynamic pseudo-continuous production can be performed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
The multiple image pseudo-continuous production is performed with the same variation. According to this configuration, the effect of displaying two pseudo-continuous images can be made into a series of display effects, so that a three-dimensional and dynamic pseudo-continuous effect can be created and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

[Effect 5]
In the above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-series effect, when the pseudo-series image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the illumination panel 18 is provided with a transparent area in a region different from the area where the pseudo-series image ZC4 is displayed. The continuous image ZC1 is configured to be visible through the transmission region of the illumination panel 18. According to this configuration, the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 can be peeked out from the transparent region of the illumination panel 18, so that the excitement of the pseudo-continuous production can be created. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZC-1]
A gaming machine including a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
Each of the first display means and the second display means can execute a plurality of types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a predetermined effect may be performed.
As the predetermined effect, a pseudo continuous effect using the first display means and the second display means is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-2]
The gaming machine described in ZC-1.
In the predetermined display effect, the first display means displays a first pseudo-continuous image that can form the pseudo-continuous effect, and the second display means can configure the pseudo-continuous effect. Pseudo continuous image is displayed,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-3]
The gaming machine described in ZC-2.
The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-4]
The gaming machine described in ZC-3.
The predetermined display effect is performed in the same variation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-5]
The gaming machine described in ZC-4.
In the predetermined display effect, when the first pseudo-continuous image is displayed on the first display means, the second display means includes an area where the second pseudo-continuous image is displayed. Is provided with a transparent region that is transparent to different regions, and the first pseudo-continuous image is visible through the transparent region of the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ The operation unit image (button image) is displayed on the first pseudo-ream image, and the effect suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-ream or the pseudo-ream effect is performed by pushing the button.
○ By pushing the button, the third display means moves to the front of the first pseudo-continuous image of the first display means, and the first pseudo-continuous image is displayed on the third display means.
○ When the third display means moves, the second pseudo-continuous image disappears.

The image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. This image display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10. Further, in the image display effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Image display effect A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 84C, the continuous notice effect is executed. In the continuation notice effect, the effect notice image PNG1 "continue" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In the production notice image PNG1, the characters "continue" are arranged in the horizontal direction. The production suggested by "continuation" is a pseudo-continuous production. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position as shown by the arrow YG2. Here, too, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the image display effect is executed. This image display effect is an effect of displaying the effect notice image PNG2 similar to the effect notice image PNG1 in the continuous notice effect on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L moved to the advance position. In the production notice image PNG2, the characters "continue" are arranged in the vertical direction. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the revariation effect is executed. This re-variation effect is an effect of re-variating the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R for the pseudo-ream. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L returns to the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

[Image display effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), the continuous notice effect is executed. In the continuation notice effect, the effect notice image PNG1 "continue" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In the production notice image PNG1, the characters "continue" are arranged in the horizontal direction. The production suggested by "continuation" is a pseudo-continuous production. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position as shown by the arrow YG2. Here, too, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), the image display effect is executed. This image display effect is an effect of displaying the effect notice image PNG2 similar to the effect notice image PNG1 in the continuous notice effect on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L moved to the advance position. In the production notice image PNG2, the characters "continue" are arranged in the vertical direction. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (G), the revariation effect is executed. This re-variation effect is an effect of re-variating the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R for the pseudo-ream. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L returns to the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

[Image display effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the chance effect is executed. In the chance effect, the message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the message image MG1 is "super hot", and the characters "super hot" are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position as shown by the arrow YG2. Here, too, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), the image display effect is executed. This image display effect is an effect of displaying the same message image MG2 as the message image MG1 in the chance effect on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L moved to the advance position. In the message image MG2, the characters "super hot" are arranged in the vertical direction. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. And when the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a big hit. The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "5". The display of the reserved image 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Image display effect D]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the chance effect is executed. In the chance effect, the message image MG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the message image MG is "super hot", and the characters "super hot" are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. And when the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. This fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both set to "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is set to "4". The display of the reserved image 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

In FIG. 86, the message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. On the other hand, in FIG. 87, the message image MG is displayed only on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, the image display effect C shown in FIG. 86 has a higher expectation for a big hit than the image display effect D shown in FIG. 87.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the effect notice image PNG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the effect notice image PNG2 similar to the effect notice image PNG1 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. (FIGS. 84 (C) (F), FIGS. 85 (C) (F)). Further, after displaying the message image MG1 on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIGS. 86 (C) and 86 (F)). ). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the production notice image and the message image stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub display device 10L is moved (FIGS. 84 (D) (E), FIGS. 85 (D) (E), FIG. 86 (D) (E)) to display the left sub display. The effect preview image PNG2 and the message image MG2 are displayed on the display screen of the device 10L. According to this configuration, since the left sub-display device 10L is moved, it is possible to make the effect notice image and the message image stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the retracted position to the advanced position so as to cover the effect notice image PNG1 and the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the production notice image and the message image stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the effect notice image PNG2 and the message image MG2 on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the left sub display device 10L is returned to the evacuation position. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the production notice image and the message image stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, while the left sub display device 10L is moving, the image of the portion of the image of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. It can be displayed on the display screen (FIGS. 85 (D) (E), 86 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, the display of the display screen 7a is not hindered by the movement of the left sub-display device 10L, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIG. 86), the message is displayed only on the display screen 7a. Compared with the case where the image MG is displayed (FIG. 87), the degree of expectation for the jackpot is higher. According to this configuration, expectations are high for the display on the left sub-display device 10L, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect notice images PNG1 and PNG2 for notifying the effect to be executed later are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the effect to be executed later, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the image display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect using the left sub-display device 10L has been used, but in addition to or instead of the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R may be used to display the effect notice image or the message image.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the message image of "super hot" has been described as an example, but the message image is not limited to this. For example, various images such as the number of acquired game balls, instructions during the game such as "right-handed", "Congratulations" at the time of a big hit, and a title display showing the type of the big hit are targeted.

[Modification 3]
In the above, when the left sub display device 10L is moved, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, when the left sub display device 10L is moved, the reserved image 9A may be displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A7-1]
The first display device that can display images and produce effects,
A game machine including a second display device different from the first display device.
After displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the display screen of the second display device is provided with an effect control means capable of displaying an image similar to the predetermined image. A game machine to play.

[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-1.
After displaying the predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the effect control means moves the second display device and displays an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device. A game machine characterized by doing.

[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-2.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second display device is moved from an origin position so as to cover the predetermined image.

[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-3.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that after displaying an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device, the second display device is returned to the origin position.

[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-2 to A7-4.
While the second display device is moving, the effect control means displays an image of a portion covered by the second display device on the display screen of the first display device on the display screen of the second display device. A game machine characterized by being possible.

[Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5.
When the effect control means displays a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device and then displays an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device, the display of the first display device. A game machine characterized in that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when a predetermined image is displayed only on the screen.

[Aspect A7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-6.
The predetermined image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a preview image that announces an effect to be executed later.

[Aspect A7-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-7.
The effect control means can display a hold image corresponding to the hold storage on the display screen of the second display device, and when the hold image is not displayed on the second display device, the effect control means is displayed on the first display device. A gaming machine characterized by displaying information related to a pending image.

The sub-display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. This sub-display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the sub display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10. Further, in the sub-display effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub-display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Sub display effect A]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 88C, the reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, the message image MSG "development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position as shown by the arrow YG2. Here, too, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), the message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. Here, the message image "Hot" is displayed. The message image of "Atsuizo" is overlaid on the battle image.
In addition, in FIGS. 88 (D) (E) (F), the battle effect is executed in parallel with the above-mentioned effect. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle production, the expectation for the jackpot will increase.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (G), the medium symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, fluctuates downward as indicated by the arrow YG3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (H), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that "5", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is stopped.

[Sub display effect B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 89A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, the reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, the message image MSG "development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins here, the expectation for the jackpot will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot portions of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the "super" message image is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the "hot" message image is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the left part of the middle effect symbol 8C "3" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the right part of the middle effect symbol 8C "3" is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The part is displayed and is moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "5". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Sub display effect C]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90C, the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position as shown by the arrow YG2. The image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), the special symbol stop effect is executed. This special symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has moved to the advanced position, and the middle effect symbol 8C is an effect of being a special symbol. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C called "development" is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins here, the expectation for the jackpot will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot portions of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), the message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the "super" message image is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the "hot" message image is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The message image is displayed superimposed on the image of the battle effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "5". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Sub display effect D]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, the message image MSG "development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position as shown by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position to the advance position as shown by the arrow YG2. Here, too, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. Here, the message image "Hot" is displayed. The message image of "Atsuizo" is overlaid on the battle image.
In addition, in FIGS. 91 (D), (E), and (F), the battle effect is executed in parallel with the above-mentioned effect. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle production, the expectation for the jackpot will increase. Further, during the battle effect, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), the medium symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, fluctuates downward as indicated by the arrow YG3. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (H), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that "5", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is stopped. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the sub display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed by using the display screen of the sub display device 10 (FIGS. 88 (D), (E), and F), FIGS. 89 (D) (E), 90 (C) (D) (F) (G), 91 (D) (E) (F)). Further, the reserved image 9A is displayed by using the display screen of the sub display device 10 (FIGS. 88 (A) (B) (C), 89 (A) (B) (C) (G), FIG. 90. (A) (B) (H), FIGS. 91 (A) (B) (C)). Furthermore, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to display the middle effect symbol 8C (FIGS. 88 (G) (H), 89 (F), 90 (E), 91 (G) (FIG. H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by various effects on the sub display device 10.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, an image of a portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (FIG. 88 (Fig. 88). F), FIGS. 89 (D) (E), 90 (F) (G), 91 (F)). According to this configuration, the effect on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, while moving the left sub display device 10L, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. (FIGS. 88 (D) (E), 90 (C) (D), 91 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, the effect on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a message image can be displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 together with a part of the image of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 88 (F), 89 (E), 90 (G) and 91 (F). According to this configuration, the effect on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the stop display of the middle effect symbol 8C is performed using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIGS. 88 (H), 90 (E), 91 (H)). .. According to this configuration, it is possible to raise expectations for the stop effect of the medium effect symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to display the variation of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIGS. 88 (G), 89 (F), 91 (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to raise expectations for the subsequent stop production of the intermediate production symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the sub-display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in one variation, a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed by using the display screen of the sub display device 10, the reserved image 9A is displayed, and the medium effect symbol 8C Is displayed. On the other hand, it is not necessary to do everything during one fluctuation.
[Modification 2]
In the above, the message images of "hot" and "super hot" are superimposed on the battle image in the message addition effect. On the other hand, only the message image may be displayed instead of the battle image.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A8-1]
The first display device that can display images and produce effects,
A game machine including a second display device different from the first display device.
Using the display screen of the second display device, a part of the image displayed on the display screen of the first display device is displayed, and the first effect and the hold memory constituting the image together with the first display device are used. It is characterized in that it is provided with an effect control means capable of performing a second effect of displaying the corresponding reserved image and a third effect of displaying a predetermined row of effect symbols on the display screen of the first display device. A game machine to play.

[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-1.
The effect control means displays an image of a portion of the image displayed on the display screen of the first display device covered by the second display device on the display screen of the second display device in the first effect. A game machine characterized by doing.

[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-2.
The effect control means can move the second display device in the first effect, and during the movement of the second display device, the portion covered by the second display device is displayed on the second display. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be displayed on the display screen of the device.

[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-3.
The effect control means is characterized in that, in the first effect, another image can be displayed on the second display device by superimposing or substituting an image of a portion covered by the second display device. A game machine to play.

[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-4.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the third effect, a stop display of a predetermined row of effect symbols in the first display device is performed.

[Aspect A8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-5.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the third effect, variable display of a predetermined row of effect symbols in the first display device is performed.

[Aspect A8-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-6.
In at least one of the first effect and the third effect, the effect control means displays the hold image corresponding to the hold storage on a display screen of a display device different from the second display device. A featured game machine.

The reserved arrangement direction change effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95. This hold arrangement direction change effect can be executed during the change effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold arrangement direction change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 or the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold arrangement direction change effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R ) Change the position and inclination.

[Holding arrangement direction change effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the hold arrangement direction change effect A. In the hold arrangement direction change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L changes is executed. In this embodiment, when the left sub display device 10L is stationary without changing its position or posture, the display positions of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are changed. , An embodiment in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A changes is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 92 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 92B, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at “2”. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) moves from the retracted position toward the upper relay position (relay position) and stops at the relay position. During the upward movement of the sub-display device 10, the four hold icons 9A maintain their display. That is, by moving the sub-display device 10 upward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (crossing) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. ..

As shown in FIG. 92 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pseudo-ream suggestion image represented as “ream” suggesting that the pseudo-ream is started as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed. .. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is stationary at the relay position, and in the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L), the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is Switch from horizontal to vertical. In this switching, the display of the four hold icons 9A arranged in the horizontal direction may disappear, and the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction may be newly displayed, or the display of the four hold icons 9A may be maintained. Then, the arrangement direction may be gradually switched from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. Here, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A is also horizontal. That is, each of the hold icons 9A is displayed at an angle of 90 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 92 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, an image represented as "second time !!!" is displayed, which suggests that the second time of the pseudo-ream is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), a third reach is formed. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the battle effect is executed. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is stationary at the relay position, and in the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L), the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is A continuously changing production is performed. In other words, the effect of continuously changing the angle in the direction (arrangement direction) of the four hold icons 9A is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), of the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction, the fourth hold at the top is set as the rotation axis, and the first to first hold icons are maintained. 3 Hold moves counterclockwise. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92 (D) to 92 (E), the left sub display device 10L approaches the horizontal side, and finally, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the left sub display device It will be in a state along the horizontal side of 10L. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A changes as the arrangement direction changes. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons matches the arrangement direction.

As shown in FIG. 92 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the battle effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner after being defeated. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) moves from the relay position toward the lower retracted position (home position) and stands still at the retracted position. During the downward movement of the sub-display device 10, the four hold icons 9A maintain their display. That is, by moving the sub-display device 10 downward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (crossing) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. ..

As shown in FIG. 92 (H), the following variable display is made on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is stationary at the retracted position, and the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) has a hold number of 3 due to hold digestion. Three hold icons 9A are displayed. Here, an effect is performed in which the arrangement directions of the three hold icons 9A are continuously changed. During this effect, as shown in FIG. 92 (I), when the variable display ends on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the decorative symbol is stopped, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) is displayed. ) Hold icon 9A has a hold number of 2 due to hold digestion. At this time, the hold icon 9A is continuously produced to continuously change the arrangement direction. As shown in FIG. 92 (J), when the number of hold icons 9A (number of holds) of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) is 1, one hold icon 9A has two or more holds. The display position changes so that the arrangement direction of the case changes. In addition, the inclination of the hold icon 9A also changes.

[Holding arrangement direction change effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the hold arrangement direction change effect B. In the hold arrangement direction change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. Further, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the main display device 7 or the left sub display device 10L is changed is executed. In this embodiment, the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A changes by changing the display position of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the stationary state. By changing the display position of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A changes, and the left sub display. An embodiment in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L changes as the posture of the device 10L changes is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 93 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 93 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the effect of continuously changing the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is performed. In other words, the effect of continuously changing the angle in the direction (arrangement direction) of the four hold icons 9A is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), of the four hold icons 9A arranged in the horizontal direction, the rightmost first hold is set as the rotation axis, and the second to second hold icons are maintained. 4 Hold moves clockwise. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 93 (B) to 93 (C), the arrangement directions of the four hold icons 9A approach each other vertically, and finally, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the four hold icons are finally arranged. The arrangement direction of 9A becomes vertical. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A changes as the arrangement direction changes. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons matches the arrangement direction.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93 (C) and 93 (D), the movement effect of the four vertically arranged hold icons 9A is executed. Specifically, the four vertically arranged hold icons 9A move in the horizontal direction (rightward direction) while maintaining the display. In other words, the four hold icons 9A move in the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal (intersecting) with the arrangement direction (vertical direction). Then, it stops at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction tilt to the left while maintaining the display, and stop in that state. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the four hold icons 9A move upward in an inclined state. Also in this case, the four hold icons 9A arranged diagonally move in the vertical direction (upward direction) while maintaining the display. In other words, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) that intersects the arrangement direction (diagonal direction). Then, it stops at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The four hold icons 9A may be framed out from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 as they are without stopping at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the left sub display device 10L after disappearing from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (H), the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates clockwise at the relay position (relay position) to advance to the advance position (deployment position). Move to and rest (stop) there. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes by rotating the left sub display device 10L to the right. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A also changes as the sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons matches the arrangement direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (I), in a state where the left sub-display device 10L is stationary (stopped) at the advanced position (deployed position), the arrangement directions of the four hold icons 9A change continuously. The production is done. In other words, the effect of continuously changing the angle in the direction (arrangement direction) of the four hold icons 9A is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 93 (I) and 93 (J), the four hold icons 9A have a state in which the arrangement direction is tilted diagonally to the right and a state in which the arrangement direction is tilted diagonally to the left. It moves from the upper side to the lower side of the left sub-display device 10L while swinging so as to alternate.

[Holding arrangement direction change effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the hold arrangement direction change effect C. In the hold arrangement direction change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a hold arrangement direction change effect is executed in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L changes. In this embodiment, an embodiment in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L changes by changing the posture of the left sub display device 10L is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 94 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 94 (B), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the retracted position toward the upper relay position (relay position). During the upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L, the four hold icons 9A maintain their display. That is, by moving the left sub-display device 10L upward, the four hold icons 9A move in the direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (crossing) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. To do.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94 (C) to 94 (D), the left sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and rest there. (Stop. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes by rotating the left sub display device 10L to the right. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A also changes as the sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons matches the arrangement direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the four hold icons 9A disappear on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advance position (deployment position). At this time, another image may be displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L instead of the hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 94 (F) to 94 (H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and at the retracted position. Stand still (stop). At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes due to the left rotation of the left sub display device 10L. .. Further, by moving the left sub-display device 10L downward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (crossing) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94 (I) to 94 (J), the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the left sub-display device 10L. In this state, the left sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and rest (stop) there. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A and the four hold icons 9B are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icons 9A and 9B are displayed by rotating the left sub display device 10L to the right. The arrangement direction changes. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A and 9B also changes as the sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A and 9B changes so that the orientation of the icons matches the arrangement direction.

[Holding arrangement direction change effect D]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the hold arrangement direction change effect D. In the hold arrangement direction change effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at “2”. On the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L changes is executed. In this embodiment, an embodiment in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L changes by changing the posture of the left sub display device 10L is illustrated. A specific image TG is also displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. The specific image represents the appearance of the specific object in the specific image TG. Here, the specific image TG is a smiley face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

As shown in FIG. 95 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pseudo-ream suggestion image represented as "ream" suggesting that the pseudo-ream is started as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed. .. At this time, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the retracted position toward the upper relay position (relay position). During the upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L, the four hold icons 9A maintain their display. That is, by moving the left sub-display device 10L upward, the four hold icons 9A move in the direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (crossing) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. To do.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95 (C) to 95 (D), the left sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and rest there. (Stop. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes by rotating the left sub display device 10L to the right. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A also changes as the sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons matches the arrangement direction. Since the specific image TG is also displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the inclination of the specific image TG also changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), the four hold icons 9A and the specific image TG disappear on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advance position (deployment position). After that, an image represented as "second time" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, suggesting that the second time of the pseudo-ream is started.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 95 (F) to 95 (H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and at the retracted position. Stand still (stop). At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes due to the left rotation of the left sub display device 10L. .. Further, by moving the left sub-display device 10L downward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (crossing) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), the second variation display is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), a reach is formed in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at "6", suggesting that the pseudo-ream is started as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. A pseudo-ream suggestion image represented as "ream" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95 (I) to 95 (J), the left sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and rest there. (Stop. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes by rotating the left sub display device 10L to the right. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A also changes as the sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons matches the arrangement direction. Since the specific image TG is also displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the inclination of the specific image TG also changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise. As shown in FIG. 95 (J), on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advance position (deployment position), the four hold icons 9A and the specific image TG disappear, and the left sub display device disappears. An image represented as "third time" is displayed on the 10L display screen, suggesting that the third time of the pseudo-ream is started.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold arrangement direction change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, the arrangement direction in which the arrangement direction of the plurality of hold icons changes by changing the display position of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the sub display device 10. You can perform change effects. Further, as shown in FIG. 93, by changing the display position of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the main display device 7, it is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the direction in which the plurality of hold icons are arranged changes. As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, by changing the posture of the sub-display device 10, it is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the sub-display device 10 is changed. .. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 (D) (E), 93 (A) (B), 94 (C) (D), and 95 (C) (D), the arrangement is as shown. In the direction change effect, the angles of the directions in which the plurality of hold icons are lined up while maintaining the display are changed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 (G), 93 (E) (F), 94 (G) (H), and 95 (G) (H), the arrangement direction change effect is produced. Then, the plurality of hold icons move in the direction intersecting the line-up direction after the line-up angle changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B) (G), 93 (C) (D) (G), 94 (B) (G), and 95 (B) (G). In addition, in the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in the direction intersecting the line-up direction while maintaining the display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 (D) and 93 (B), in the arrangement direction change effect, one of a plurality of hold icons is displayed in the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. By changing the display position of the above-mentioned hold icons, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 are arranged changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 (H), 94 (C) (F), and 95 (C) (F), the sub display device 10 is configured to be rotatable. In the arrangement direction change effect, the rotation of the sub-display device 10 changes the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the sub-display device 10 are lined up. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold arrangement direction change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D, it is assumed that the plurality of hold icons 9A are arranged in a straight line. However, the plurality of hold icons 9A may be displayed side by side in a curved line. In this case, the approximate straight line of the plurality of hold icons 9A can be regarded as the arrangement direction of the plurality of hold icons 9A. Further, even when a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed irregularly such as in a zigzag pattern, the approximate straight line can be regarded as the arrangement direction.

[Modification 2]
In the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 is illustrated, but the hold arrangement direction change effect may be the hold icon 9B or the hold icon 9C corresponding to the special figure 2. .. Further, the angle in the arrangement direction of one or both of these may be changed while both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A is assumed to change according to the change in the arrangement direction. However, in the hold arrangement direction change effect, only the arrangement direction may change without changing the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A.

[Modification example 4]
In the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D, when the arrangement direction of the hold icon 9A changes, the display does not have to be maintained in the portion where the display is maintained, and the portion where the display is not maintained is The display may be maintained.

[Modification 5]
In the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D, the hold icon 9A may be displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. Further, the arrangement direction of the hold icon 9A may change while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.

[Modification 6]
The contents of the reserved arrangement direction change effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the reserved arrangement direction change effects A to D may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
It is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means are arranged changes.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the angles of the plurality of hold icons in the line-up direction change while maintaining the display.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in a direction intersecting the line-up direction after the line-up angle changes.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in a direction intersecting the line-up direction while maintaining the display.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4.
In the arrangement direction change effect, in the display means, the display position of one or more of the hold icons among the plurality of hold icons is changed, so that the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means are arranged is changed. Change,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4.
The display means is configured to be rotatable and can be rotated.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the rotation of the display means changes the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means are arranged.
A game machine characterized by that.

The hold display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. This hold display effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R).

[Holding display effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect A. In the hold display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96A, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, three hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, it has a shape in which an inner rectangle and an outer rectangle surrounding the rectangle are combined, such as the right sub-display device 10R. The inner rectangular part is a part imitating the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the part between the inner rectangle and the outer rectangle is a part imitating the outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. .. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 96 (D) to 96 (J), the rightmost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 in which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 in which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the hold icon 9A is in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It begins to move in a curved shape (upward). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (F), the hold icon 9A displays the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A is on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) Starts to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), the entire hold icon 9A is the right sub display device, as if the hold icon 9A jumped from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It is displayed at the upper left position of the 10R display screen. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is the display screen of the main display device 7 and the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It moves to the second display position DP2 of, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the hold icon 9A on the right side of the two hold icons 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Hold display effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect B. In the hold display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 97A, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, it has a rectangular outer shape similar to that of the right sub-display device 10R. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 97 (D) to 97 (J), the rightmost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 in which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 in which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the hold icon 9A is in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It begins to move in a curved shape (upward). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (F), the hold icon 9A displays the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A is on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) Starts to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (H), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), the entire hold icon 9A is the right sub display device, as if the hold icon 9A jumped from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It is displayed at the upper left position of the 10R display screen. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is the display screen of the main display device 7 and the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It moves to the second display position DP2 of, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the hold icon 9A on the right side of the two hold icons 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of special figures 1 hold is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Hold display effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect C. In the hold display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 98A, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). The right sub-display device 10R has a circular shape. The right sub-display device 10R includes an annular portion R1 that constitutes an outer peripheral portion of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R is provided with a circular display screen inside the annular portion R1. The right sub-display device 10R is configured to be movable in the vertical direction between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position located above the retracted position. The annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable in the circumferential direction. That is, the annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable clockwise (clockwise) and counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. .. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The hold icon 9A representing the first special figure hold is displayed in the upper area of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9B (not shown) representing the second special figure hold is displayed in the lower area. Further, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R represents the hold icon 9C as a whole of the right sub-display device 10R. An image showing the color or pattern of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, it has a shape in which an inner circle and an outer circle surrounding the circle are combined, such as the right sub-display device 10R. The inner circular portion is a portion imitating the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the portion between the inner circular portion and the outer circular portion is an annular portion R1 which is an outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. It is a part that imitates. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 98 (D) to 98 (I), the rightmost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 in which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 in which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving. The right sub-display device 10R represents the hold icon 9C as a whole of the right sub-display device 10R. Therefore, the position of the entire right sub-display device 10R is the second display position DP2. Further, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the hold icon 9A is in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It begins to move in a curved shape (upward). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the hold icon 9A displays the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A is on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) Starts to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), the display of the main display device 7 is displayed so that the hold icon 9A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the hold icon 9A jumps into the right sub display device 10R. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the screen 7a. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (I), the hold icon 9A moves to the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the hold icon 9A on the right side of the two hold icons 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Hold display effect D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect D. In the hold display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 99A, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). The right sub-display device 10R has a circular shape. The right sub-display device 10R includes an annular portion R1 that constitutes an outer peripheral portion of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R is provided with a circular display screen inside the annular portion R1. The right sub-display device 10R is configured to be movable in the vertical direction between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position located above the retracted position. The annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable in the circumferential direction. That is, the annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable clockwise (clockwise) and counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

Then, as shown in FIG. 99A, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. .. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The hold icon 9A representing the first special figure hold is displayed in the upper area of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9B (not shown) representing the second special figure hold is displayed in the lower area. Further, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R represents the hold icon 9C as a whole of the right sub-display device 10R. An image showing the color or pattern of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, it has a shape in which an inner circle and an outer circle surrounding the circle are combined, such as the right sub-display device 10R. The inner circular portion is a portion that imitates the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the portion between the inner circular portion and the outer circular portion is an annular portion that is an outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. It is a modeled part. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. The rightmost hold icon 9A of the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It moves from the first display position DP1 that displays 9A to the second display position DP2 that displays the hold icon 9C on the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub display device 10R represents the hold icon 9C as a whole of the right sub display device 10R. Therefore, the position of the entire right sub-display device 10R is the second display position DP2. Further, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the entire right sub-display device 10R is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Then, the next variable display is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position (deployed position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the right sub-display device 10R moves downward from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R rotates clockwise (clockwise) along the circumferential direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (H), after stopping the rotation of the annular portion R1 of the right sub display device 10R, the right sub display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position again. Moving. Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (I), the right sub-display device 10R moves downward from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (J), the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) along the circumferential direction.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the left sub display device 10L for displaying the hold icon 9A and the right sub display device 10L for displaying the hold icon 9A and the right sub which is movably configured and represents the hold (the hold icon 9C). It includes a display device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the right sub-display device 10R represents the state of the hold (the hold icon 9C) including the presence or absence of the hold (the hold icon 9C). .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the hold icon 9A has a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub display device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the right sub-display device 10R has a circular shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, the right sub-display device 10R constitutes an outer peripheral portion of the right sub-display device 10R and includes an annular portion R1 that can rotate in the circumferential direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the hold display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C) has been described as having a display screen. That is, the right sub-display device 10R used the display screen to represent the hold (the hold icon 9C). However, the right sub-display device 10R may have a mode in which the display screen is not provided (the display screen is not used). For example, instead of the display screen, a light emitting device or the like that emits light so as to represent the color of the hold may be used.
[Modification 2]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (hold icon 9C) has been described as having a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (hold icon 9C). However, the right sub-display device 10R may not have a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C). For example, the shape of the right sub-display device 10R and the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C) may be completely different.
[Modification 3]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, it is assumed that the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C). explained. However, the hold icon 9A may not have a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (hold icon 9C). For example, the shape of the hold icon 9A and the shape of the right sub-display device 10R may be completely different.
[Modification example 4]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C) has been described as having a rectangular shape or a circular shape. However, the right sub-display device 10R is not limited to such a shape. The right sub-display device 10R may have, for example, an elliptical shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, or another polygonal shape.
[Modification 5]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device. It is displayed on 10L. For example, the decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) and the hold icon 9A may be displayed on the same display device (display means).

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine that is configured to be movable and has a movable accessory that represents the hold.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1.
The movable accessory represents the state of the hold including the presence or absence of the hold.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2.
The movable accessory has a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3.
The hold icon has a shape corresponding to the shape of the movable accessory.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3 or aspect B2-4.
The movable accessory has a circular shape.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5.
The movable accessory constitutes an outer peripheral portion of the movable accessory, and includes an annular portion that can rotate in the circumferential direction.
A game machine characterized by that.

The hold movement effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. This hold movement effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R).

[Holding movement production A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the hold movement effect A. In the hold movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 100A, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 100 (D) to 100 (J), the rightmost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 in which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 in which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the hold icon 9A is in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It begins to move in a curved shape (upward). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the hold icon 9A displays the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A is on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) Starts to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (I), the entire hold icon 9A is the right sub display device, as if the hold icon 9A jumped from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It is displayed at the upper left position of the 10R display screen. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is the display screen of the main display device 7 and the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It moves to the second display position DP2 of, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the hold icon 9A on the right side of the two hold icons 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of special figures 1 hold is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Holding movement effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the hold movement effect B. In the hold movement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 101 (D) to 101 (J), the rightmost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 in which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 in which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the hold icon 9A is in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Starts to move linearly (upward). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the hold icon 9A displays the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A is on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) Starts to move linearly. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (H), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (I), the entire hold icon 9A is the right sub display device, as if the hold icon 9A jumped from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It is displayed at the upper left position of the 10R display screen. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is the display screen of the main display device 7 and the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It moves to the second display position DP2 of, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the hold icon 9A on the right side of the two hold icons 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Holding movement effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the hold movement effect C. In the hold movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 102 (D) to 102 (I), the rightmost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 in which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 in which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the hold icon 9A is in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally to the right) from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It begins to move in a curved shape (upward). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the hold icon 9A is displayed from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and disappeared. Erase. Further, in addition to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 or the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A once disappeared jumped into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R from above. A part (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (H), the entire hold icon 9A is located at the upper left position of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, as if the hold icon 9A jumped into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Is displayed. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (I), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It moves to the second display position DP2 of, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the hold icon 9A on the right side of the two hold icons 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of special figures 1 hold is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Holding movement effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the hold movement effect D. In the hold movement effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 103 (D) to 103 (H), the rightmost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 in which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 in which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the hold icon 9A is in the direction of the arrow AD1 from the first display position DP1 of the left sub-display device 10L toward the first display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R. It begins to move linearly (diagonally downward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally downward to the right). Is in a different direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), as if the hold icon 9A jumped from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the display screen of the right sub display device 10R was displayed. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), the entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, just as the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (H), the hold icon 9A moves to the second display position DP2 on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the hold icon 9A on the right side of the two hold icons 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the first effect. After the effect of, the hold icon 9A moves from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2 for displaying the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is possible to execute a second effect displayed so as to be performed, and a third effect in which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R after the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is set by using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed so as to move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed in the order of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. To. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the display screen of the main display device 7 Using 7a, the hold icon 9A is displayed so as to move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the right sub display. It is displayed in the order of the display screen of the device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the direction in which a plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up and the hold icon 9A in the second effect are arranged. The direction in which the movement starts from the first display position DP1 is different from the direction in which the movement starts. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed so as to move in a curved line from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. The curve. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the hold movement effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the hold movement effects A, B, and D of FIGS. 100, 101, and 103, the hold icon 9A has been described as being displayed so as to continuously move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. However, the hold icon 9A may be displayed so as to move intermittently from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2.
[Modification 2]
In the hold movement effects A, B, and D of FIGS. 100, 101, and 103, the hold icon 9A is described as being displayed so as to move linearly or curvedly from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. did. However, the method of moving the hold icon 9A is not limited to these.
[Modification 3]
In the hold movement effect of FIGS. 100 to 103, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device. It is displayed on 10L. For example, the decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) and the hold icon 9A may be displayed on the same display device (display means).
[Modification example 4]
In the hold movement effect of FIGS. 100 to 103, the direction in which a plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) and the hold icon 9A start moving from the first display position DP1. The direction (direction of arrow AD1) is different from that of the direction. However, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A are lined up (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 may be the same direction (for example, the horizontal direction).

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
A first display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine provided with a second display means for indicating the hold.
The first effect in which the hold icon is displayed at the first position in the first display means, and
After the first effect, the hold icon is displayed so as to move from the first position to the second position where the hold is displayed in the second display means by using the first display means. The second production to be done and
After the second effect, it is possible to execute the third effect in which the hold is displayed on the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
Further equipped with a third display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed so as to move from the first position to the second position by using the first display means and the third display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2.
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed in the order of the first display means and the third display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
Further equipped with a third display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
In the second effect, the hold icon is moved from the first position to the second position by using the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. Displayed in,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4.
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed in the order of the first display means, the third display means, and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-5.
The direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the first display means are lined up and the direction in which the hold icons start to move from the first position in the second effect are different directions.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-6.
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed so as to move in a curved line from the first position to the second position.
A game machine characterized by that.

The information display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. This information display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the information display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10.

[The information display effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed to red on hold. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed as a fixed stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost at the same time as the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as shown by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first storage area becomes the reserved image 9C, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the first storage area. The reserved image 9A corresponds to the reserved image 9A, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the reserved image 9C which has been changed to red is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins here, the expectation for the jackpot will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot portions of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Further, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[The information display effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed to red on hold. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, information on the degree of expectation for a jackpot corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed. Here, the message image MSG "so-so" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed as a fixed stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost at the same time as the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as shown by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first storage area moves to the right sub-display device 10R, and the message image MSG of "super hot" is displayed. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (E), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, "super hot" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins here, the expectation for the jackpot will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot portions of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Further, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, the display on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[The information display effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). In particular, the right sub-display device 10R is a circular display device that imitates a reserved image. As a result, the right sub-display device 10R indicates the hold in the entire device. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed to red on hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed as a fixed stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost at the same time as the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as shown by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first storage area moves to the right sub display device 10R, and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R turns red. At this time, the effect as if the reserved image 9A (red) on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R is produced by using the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 located on the back side. Will be executed. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R indicating the hold is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins here, the expectation for the jackpot will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, the foot portion of the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears from red as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[The information display effect D]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). In particular, the right sub-display device 10R is a circular display device that imitates a reserved image. As a result, the right sub-display device 10R indicates the hold in the entire device. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed to red on hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed as a fixed stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost at the same time as the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as shown by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first storage area moves to the right sub display device 10R, and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R turns red. At this time, the effect as if the reserved image 9A (red) on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R is produced by using the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 located on the back side. Will be executed. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (E), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R indicating the hold is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (G), the battle / information addition effect is executed. This battle / information addition effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins here, the expectation for the jackpot will increase. In addition, the battle / information addition effect is an effect of adding information for the fluctuation. Here, a triangular symbol is added to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, suggesting that it is even hotter than the red color alone. Of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, the foot portion of the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears from red as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the information display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, information related to the fluctuation is displayed by using a right sub display device 10R different from the main display device 7 (FIGS. 104 (A), (B), (D), (E), and (F). ), FIGS. 105 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F), FIGS. 106 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F) (G), FIGS. 107 (A) (B) ( D) (E) (F) (G)). According to this configuration, the information related to the fluctuation becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape imitating a hold image, and shows the hold (FIGS. 106 and 107). According to this configuration, the information related to the fluctuation becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, information indicating the degree of expectation for a jackpot is displayed using the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R (FIGS. 104 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F), 105 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 106 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F) (G), FIG. 107 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F) (G)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the degree of expectation for a big hit in the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold image 9A is displayed by using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. According to this configuration, the reserved information becomes easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold shift effect is executed, and the hold image corresponding to the first storage area of the left sub display device 10L is produced as if it has moved to the right sub display device 10R (FIG. 104). (D), FIG. 105 (D), FIG. 106 (D), FIG. 107 (D). According to this configuration, the information displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R corresponds to the fluctuation. It becomes easier to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is used to produce an effect as if the reserved image corresponding to the first storage area of the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R. (Fig. 106 (D), Fig. 107 (D)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the information displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R corresponds to the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the information display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the right sub-display device 10R is used to suggest the information of the fluctuation, but the left sub-display device 10L may be used to suggest the information of the fluctuation.
[Modification 2]
In the above description, it is assumed that the reserved image is red, but the colors of the reserved image can be various, such as blue, green, purple, and gold.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B4-1]
The first display device that can display images and produce effects,
A game machine including a second display device different from the first display device.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second display device is used and an effect control means for displaying information related to the current fluctuation is provided.

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1.
The second display device is a gaming machine characterized in that it has a shape imitating a reserved image.

[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2.
The game machine characterized in that the information related to the fluctuation is information indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit.

[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first display device can display a hold image corresponding to hold storage.

[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4.
The effect control means moves as if the reserved image in the first display device is shifted in accordance with the digestion of the reserved memory, and the reserved image corresponding to the next variation is moved to the second display device. A game machine characterized by performing production.

[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that the movement effect is performed using a third display device located behind the first display device and the second display device.

[Aspect B4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-6.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the reserved image is not displayed on the first display device, the reserved image is displayed on a display screen of a display device other than the first display device.

The hold icon interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. This hold icon interlocking effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon interlocking effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the device 7 or the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon interlocking effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R). Change the position and tilt of.

[Hold icon interlocking effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect A. In the hold icon interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 108 (A), the third hold icon, which is the third from the right, is described as the specific hold icon. Here, among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is referred to as a specific hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 108 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 108 (B), the third hold icon 9A from the right of the four hold icons 9A is held and changed by look-ahead. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

As shown in FIG. 108 (C), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is held by hold digestion. The shift movement of the icon 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the right, frames out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then right. It is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved to the right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right side (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A becomes the second hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 108 (D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character of "heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (E), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) holds and digests. The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again by. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the right, frames out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then right. It is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved to the right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. The specific hold icon 9A becomes the first hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device) is shown as shown in FIGS. 108 (F) and 108 (G). In 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the shift movement of the hold icon 9A by hold digestion is performed again. Specifically, the specific hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the right in order to be held, and the left sub display device 10L is displayed. After frame-out from the screen, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the specific hold icon 9A frames in from the left side of the display screen, moves to the right, and then frames out from the right side of the display screen. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R after being framed out (after disappearing) from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A (new). ) Is displayed. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the specific image TG is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved to the right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific hold icon (always located below the specific hold icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 108 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A is performed. In the left sub-display device 10L, the number of holds is 1 due to hold digestion, and one hold icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R and moves to the left. That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the right side of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R from which the specific hold icon 9A is framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (I), the specific image TG stops near the center of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at "3". That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high in the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Hold icon interlocking effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect B. In the hold icon interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 109 (A), the third hold icon, which is the third from the right, will be described as the specific hold icon. Here, among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is referred to as a specific hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 109 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 109 (B), the third hold icon 9A, which is the third from the right among the four hold icons 9A, is held and changed by look-ahead. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

As shown in FIG. 109 (C), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon due to hold digestion is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. A shift movement of 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, and then frames out from the right side of the display screen 7a. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A becomes the second hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 109 (D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character of "heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 are subjected to hold digestion. The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moved to the upper right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen 7a. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the first hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbol is variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device) is displayed as shown in FIGS. 109 (F) and 109 (G). In 10) and the main display device 7, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A by the hold digestion is performed again. Specifically, the specific hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right to display the left sub display device 10L. After frame-out from the screen, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific hold icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, and then frames out from the right side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after being framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moved in the upper right direction, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific hold icon 9A (always located below the specific hold icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 109 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A is performed. In the left sub-display device 10L, the number of holds is 1 due to hold digestion, and one hold icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" is framed in from the right side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves to the left. That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the right side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in which the specific hold icon 9A is once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (I), the specific image TG stops near the right end of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at "3". That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high in the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Hold icon interlocking effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect C. In the hold icon interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110A, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 110 (A), the third hold icon, which is the third from the right, is described as the specific hold icon. Here, among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is referred to as a specific hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The third hold icon 9A from the right, which is the third from the right of the four hold icons 9A, is held and changed by look-ahead. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon due to hold digestion is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. A shift movement of 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, and then draws a parabolic trajectory as shown in FIG. 110 (C). It moves in the lower right direction, and is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a above the right sub-display device 10R. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right side (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A becomes the second hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 110 (D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character of "heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (E), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 are subjected to hold digestion. The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in a parabolic trajectory in the lower right direction, and moves in the lower right direction. Above 10R, the frame is out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the first hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbol is variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device) is shown as shown in FIGS. 110 (F) and 110 (G). In 10) and the main display device 7, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A by the hold digestion is performed again. Specifically, the specific hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right to display the left sub display device 10L. After frame-out from the screen, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific hold icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in the lower right direction in a parabolic trajectory, and is displayed in the right sub display. Above the device 10R, the frame is out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after being framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in the lower right direction in a parabolic trajectory, and moves in the lower right direction. Above 10R, the frame is out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific hold icon 9A (always located below the specific hold icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 110 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A is performed. In the left sub-display device 10L, the number of holds is 1 due to hold digestion, and one hold icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" is framed in from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves upward. That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in which the specific hold icon 9A is once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (I), the specific image TG stops near the lower right of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at "3". That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high in the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Hold icon interlocking effect D]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect D. In the hold icon interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 111A, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 110 (A), the third hold icon, which is the third from the right, is described as the specific hold icon. Here, among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is referred to as a specific hold icon. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

As shown in FIG. 111A, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The third hold icon 9A from the right, which is the third from the right of the four hold icons 9A, is held and changed by look-ahead. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

As shown in FIG. 111 (B), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon due to hold digestion is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. A shift movement of 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9C of the right sub-display device 10R disappears. The hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the main display device 7 is displayed. It is displayed on the screen 7a. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, and then draws a parabolic trajectory as shown in FIG. 111 (C). It moves in the lower right direction, and is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a above the right sub-display device 10R. Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, and then stops at a predetermined position as shown in FIG. 111 (D), and the hold icon 9A is held. It becomes icon 9C. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A becomes the second hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 111 (D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character of "heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 are subjected to hold digestion. The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again. Specifically, the hold icon 9C of the right sub-display device 10R disappears. The hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the main display device 7 is displayed. It is displayed on the screen 7a. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in a parabolic trajectory in the lower right direction, and moves in the lower right direction. Above 10R, the frame is out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, and then stops at a predetermined position to become the hold icon 9C. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the first hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbol is variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device) is shown as shown in FIGS. 110 (F) and 110 (G). In 10) and the main display device 7, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A by the hold digestion is performed again. Specifically, the hold icon 9C of the right sub-display device 10R disappears. The specific hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L has moved to the upper right and framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L in order to be held. After that, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific hold icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in the lower right direction in a parabolic trajectory, and is displayed in the right sub display. Above the device 10R, the frame is out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, and then stops at a predetermined position to become the hold icon 9C. At this time, the specific image TG is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after the specific hold icon 9A is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. That is, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A is not linked on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

As shown in FIG. 111 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A is performed. In the left sub-display device 10L, the number of holds is 1 due to hold digestion, and one hold icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" is framed in from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves upward. That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in which the specific hold icon 9A is once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (I), the specific image TG stops near the lower right of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at "3". That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high in the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon interlocking effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device 10L and the hold icon displayed on the left sub display device 10L The second effect in which the specific image TG is displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the hold icons, and the specific image TG on the right sub display device 10R after the specific hold icon disappears from the left sub display device 10L. Can be executed with the third effect in which is displayed. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109, 110, and 111, the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device 10L and the left sub display device 10L The second effect in which the specific image TG is displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the hold icons displayed in, and the main after the specific hold icon disappears from the left sub display device 10L. A third effect in which the specific image TG is displayed on the display device 7 can be executed. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, in the second effect, after the specific image TG is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, it is linked to the movement of the specific hold icon. The specific image TG moves. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, in the second effect, after the specific image TG is displayed so as to overlap the specific hold icon 9A, the display position of the specific image TG is changed. It changes and is displayed in a position close to the specific hold icon. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, in the third effect, after the specific hold icon 9A disappears from the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9A is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. After being displayed and disappearing from the right sub-display device 10R, the specific image TG is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109, 110, and 111, in the third effect, after the specific hold icon 9A disappears from the left sub display device 10L, the main display device After the specific hold icon 9A is displayed on the 7 and disappears from the main display device 7, the specific image TG is displayed on the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, in the third effect, when the specific hold icon 9A is put on hold, the left sub display device 10L moves to the right sub display device 10R. After moving to the right sub-display device 10R, it disappears from the right sub-display device 10R by moving toward the outside of the right sub-display device 10R, and from the position where the specific hold icon 9A disappears from the right sub-display device 10R. A specific image TG appears. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109, 110, and 111, in the third effect, when the specific hold icon 9A is put on hold, the main display is displayed from the left sub display device 10L. After moving to the device 7 and moving to the main display device 7, the position disappears from the main display device 7 by moving toward the outside of the main display device 7, and the specific hold icon 9A disappears from the main display device 7. A specific image TG appears from. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the specific image TG suggests information related to the expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon interlocking effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, the specific image TG is assumed to represent "heat". However, the specific image TG may be a character image other than "heat". For example, the specific image TG may be "no way", "chance", "super heat", or the like. Then, the degree of expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific hold icon may be changed depending on the content of the character. That is, the difference in the degree of expectation may be suggested depending on the content of the character.

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 is illustrated, but the hold icon interlocking effect may be the hold icon 9B corresponding to the special figure 2. Further, both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B may perform the above effect.

[Modification 3]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, the hold icon 9A is assumed not to change its orientation when moving. However, in the hold icon interlocking effect, the orientation of the hold icon 9A may change when it is moved. For example, the hold icon 9A may move while rotating. Further, the hold icon 9A may change in size or blink when moved.

[Modification example 4]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, when the hold icon 9A moves, the display may not be maintained in the part where the display is maintained, and the display is maintained in the part where the display is not maintained. You may.

[Modification 5]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, the hold icon 9A may be displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. Further, the specific image TG may also be displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.

[Modification 6]
The contents of the hold icon interlocking effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the hold icon interlocking effects A to D may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B5-1]
The first display means capable of displaying an image and
A gaming machine provided with a second display means capable of displaying an image.
The first effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the first display means, and
A second effect in which a specific image is displayed for a specific hold icon, which is one of the hold icons displayed in the first display means, and
After the specific hold icon disappears from the first display means, a third effect of displaying the specific image on the second display means can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1.
In the second effect, after the specific image is displayed on the first display means, the specific image moves in conjunction with the movement of the specific hold icon.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2.
In the second effect, after the specific image is displayed so as to overlap the specific hold icon, the display position of the specific image changes and is displayed at a position close to the specific hold icon.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3.
In the third effect, after the specific hold icon disappears from the first display means, the specific hold icon is displayed on the second display means, and after disappearing from the second display means, the said The specific image is displayed on the second display means,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4.
In the third effect, when the specific hold icon is put on hold, the first display means moves to the second display means, and after moving to the second display means, the second display means. By moving toward the outside of the display means, the specific image disappears from the second display means, and the specific image appears from the position where the specific hold icon disappears in the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5.
The specific image suggests information related to the expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific hold icon.
A game machine characterized by that.

The pending change suggestion effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115. This pending change suggestion effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern (for example, during the pseudo continuous effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the pending change suggestion image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 or the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R).

[Holding change suggestion production A]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect A. In the hold change suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9C is held. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of change is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a ally character CRA, which is an image representing a ally character, and an enemy character CRB, which is an image representing an enemy character. The enemy character CRA includes an image suggesting a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9C. In the present embodiment, the entire enemy character CRA is "red" to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, the ally character CRA performs an operation such as throwing a ball BG at the enemy character CRB. The ball BG, which is an image representing the ball, is included in the first pending change suggestion image HG1. Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA against the enemy character CRB hits the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is executed. Specifically, an image showing that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hit the enemy character CRB and was able to damage the enemy character CRA is displayed. That is, an image showing that the predetermined effect is successful is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the enemy character CRB is damaged and performs an operation that makes him regret. Here, a character image representing the dialogue of the enemy character CRB with "Done!" Is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), the enemy character CRB moves downward from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R while rotating slightly counterclockwise. Appears to move.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (H), the enemy character CRB is displayed so as to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The enemy character CRB is displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (I), on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the enemy character CRB collides with the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9C changes on hold. Specifically, the hold icon 9C changes from "white" to "red", which is the color of the enemy character CRB. Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (J), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Holding change suggestion effect B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect B. In the hold change suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9C is held. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of change is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a ally character CRA, which is an image representing a ally character, and an enemy character CRB, which is an image representing an enemy character. The enemy character CRA includes an image suggesting a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9C. In the present embodiment, the entire enemy character CRA is "red" to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, the ally character CRA performs an operation such as throwing a ball BG at the enemy character CRB. The ball BG, which is an image representing the ball, is included in the first pending change suggestion image HG1. Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA against the enemy character CRB hits the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is not executed. Specifically, an image showing that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, but the ball BG is bounced off by the enemy character CRA is displayed. That is, an image indicating that the predetermined effect has failed is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the enemy character CRB is damaged and performs an operation that makes him regret. Here, a character image representing the dialogue of the enemy character CRB with "Kikanuwa!" Is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Holding change suggestion production C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect C. In the hold change suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9C is held. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of change is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a ally character CRA, which is an image representing a ally character, and a ball BG, which is an image representing a ball. The ball BG includes an image suggesting a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9C. In this embodiment, the entire ball BG is "red" to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114C, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action) on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the ally character CRA performs an action like throwing a ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA flies toward the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is executed. Specifically, the ball BG is the main so that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA jumps into the left sub-display device 10L and moves toward the second hold icon 9A from the right among the three hold icons 9A. It is displayed across the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the left sub-display device 10L. That is, an image showing that the predetermined effect is successful is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA collides with the second hold icon 9A from the right among the three hold icons 9A of the left sub-display device 10L, and the hold icon 9A is held. Icon 9A changes on hold. Specifically, the hold icon 9A changes from "white" to "red", which is the same color as the ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs an operation that pleases. Here, a character image representing the dialogue of the ally character CRA, "Yeah!", Is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (I), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Holding change suggestion effect D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect D. In the hold change suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9C is held. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of change is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a ally character CRA, which is an image representing a ally character, and a ball BG, which is an image representing a ball. The ball BG includes an image suggesting a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9C. In this embodiment, the entire ball BG is "red" to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, the ally character CRA performs an action like throwing a ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA flies toward the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is not executed. Specifically, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the left sub-display device 10L, and an image showing that the ball BG has bounced off is displayed. That is, an image indicating that the predetermined effect has failed is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs an operation that is regrettable. Here, a character image representing the line of the ally character CRA "No!" Is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (H), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the pending change suggestion image effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the first effect in which the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9C) is displayed on the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R). After the first display effect, the second effect of displaying the first hold change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) can be executed. .. The first hold change suggestion image HG1 includes, at least in part, an image suggesting a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, after the second effect, the first hold change suggestion suggests the possibility of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9C) being held. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the second pending change suggestion image HG2 different from the image HG1 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggests, at least in part, the mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). Includes images to be used. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is executed. is there. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9C) is displayed on at least a part of the second hold change suggestion image HG2 in the third effect. Display to move toward the current position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, after the third effect, the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is possible to carry out the production of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 115, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is not executed. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pending change suggestion image effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, but the first hold change suggestion image HG1 is displayed, for example, on the left sub display. The display may be made on the device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, other display devices, or the like. Further, the display may be performed across a plurality of display devices.
[Modification 2]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, an image (enemy character CRB, ball BG) in which a part of the first hold change suggestion image HG1 suggests a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). However, the entire first hold change suggestion image HG1 may be an image suggesting the mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Modification 3]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, an image (enemy character CRB, ball BG) in which a part of the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggests a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). However, the entire second hold change suggestion image HG2 may be an image suggesting the mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Modification example 4]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 and the second hold change suggestion image HG2 are continuously displayed. For example, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 is displayed. The second pending change suggestion image HG2 may be displayed after the disappearance of.
[Modification 5]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 and the second hold change suggestion image HG2 are related images. For example, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 and the second hold change suggestion image HG2. Suggestion image An image that is completely unrelated to HG2 may be used.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of effects.
The first effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the display means, and
After the first display effect, a second effect of displaying a first hold change suggestion image suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon can be executed.
The first hold change suggestion image includes, at least in part, an image suggesting a post-hold change aspect of the hold icon.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1.
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which a second hold change suggestion image different from the first hold change suggestion image is displayed, which suggests the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon. Is,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2.
The second hold change suggestion image includes, at least in part, an image suggesting a post-hold change aspect of the hold icon.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2 or aspect B6-3.
The second hold change suggestion image is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4.
In the third effect, at least a part of the second hold change suggestion image is displayed so as to move toward the position where the hold icon is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4 or aspect B6-5.
After the third effect, a fourth effect of changing the hold icon from the first aspect to the second aspect can be performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2 or aspect B6-3.
The second hold change suggestion image is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon is not executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol display mode effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. This decorative symbol display mode effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the jackpot game, and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the pending change suggestion image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 or the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R).

[Decorative pattern display mode production A]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect A. In the decorative pattern display mode effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the second movable accessory 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the jackpot game, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. The number of times (number of changes) of the decorative symbol variation effect during this jackpot game is the 99th. Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. As a result, the 99th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. To. The number of decorative symbol variation effects (number of variations) during this jackpot game is the 100th. Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. As a result, the 100th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed. That is, the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), when the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Appears once. Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advance position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (H), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at the advanced position and stops in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed again. The decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. The number of times (number of changes) of the decorative symbol variation effect during this jackpot game is the 101st. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being tilted from the horizontal direction at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. As a result, the 101st decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being tilted from the horizontal direction at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern display mode production B]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect B. In the decorative pattern display mode effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), the second movable accessory 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the jackpot game, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. The number of times (number of changes) of the decorative symbol variation effect during this jackpot game is the 99th. Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. As a result, the 99th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. To. The number of decorative symbol variation effects (number of variations) during this jackpot game is the 100th. Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. As a result, the 100th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed. That is, the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), when the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Appears once. Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advance position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (H), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at the advanced position and stops in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed again. The decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. The number of times (number of changes) of the decorative symbol variation effect during this jackpot game is the 101st. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the horizontal direction, respectively. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. As a result, the 101st decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the horizontal direction, respectively. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern display mode production C]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect C. In the decorative pattern display mode effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), the second movable accessory 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). Further, although not shown in FIG. 118 (A), the first movable accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L, right movable accessory 14R) is also located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, “7”) to form a reach. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decoration are displayed at the timing immediately before the changing intermediate decorative symbol 8C stops. The display of the symbol 8R disappears once, and the button image BTN and the operation promotion image SSG are displayed. Operation promotion image The SSG is a character image of "press" and prompts the player to operate (press operation).

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the left movable accessory 14L moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Along with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united at the advance position (deployment position) to form one logo, and the display screen of the main display device 7 is formed. Stop so as to cover the vicinity of the center of 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 stops at an advance position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined to stand still. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (F), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate counterclockwise at the advanced position and stop in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. The inclination angle at this time is the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 in FIGS. 116 (H) and 117 (H) described above. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (G), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate clockwise at the advanced position, return to the horizontal position, and stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (H), the left movable accessory 14L moves to the left from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Along with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (I), the left movable accessory 14L returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the right movable accessory 14R returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R have the same numbers (here, “7”). It will be confirmed and stopped in the form of a jackpot. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect D]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect D. In the decorative symbol display mode effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the jackpot game, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used. The decorative pattern variation effect (variation display) is executed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 116 (I), the second movable accessory 15 stops in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction at the advance position. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being tilted from the horizontal direction at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R have the same numbers (here, “7”). It will stop in a big hit manner. At this time, similarly to FIG. 116 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being tilted from the horizontal direction at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 remains unchanged, and the first movable accessory 14 and The second movable accessory 15 rotates clockwise at the advanced position, returns to the horizontal position, and stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), the left movable accessory 14L moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Along with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united at the advance position (deployment position) to form one logo, and the display screen of the main display device 7 is formed. Stop so as to cover the vicinity of the center of 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 stops at an advance position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined to stand still. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (G), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate counterclockwise at the advanced position and stop in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. The inclination angle at this time is the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 of FIGS. 119 (A) and 119 (B) described above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate clockwise at the advanced position, return to the horizontal position, and stop. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (I), the left movable accessory 14L moves to the left from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Along with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (J), the left movable accessory 14L returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the right movable accessory 14R returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern display mode effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the first direction (horizontal line L1). The first display mode, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side in a second direction (inclined line LN2) different from the first direction. The display mode and is feasible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
As shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment changes from the first display mode to the second display mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the predetermined condition is that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1) in the first display mode, and is the second. Is arranged along the second direction (inclination line LN2) in the display mode of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, at the time of a big hit, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united at the advance position and are united in the first direction (horizontal line LN1). ), Then the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R in the combined state are rotated and arranged along the second direction (inclined line LN2). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, at the time of a big hit, the second movable accessory 15 is oriented in the same direction as the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. Be placed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern display mode effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol display mode effects A to C of FIGS. 116 to 118, in the first display mode, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the first direction (horizontal direction, horizontal line L1). Although they are displayed side by side along the above, the first direction is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be any direction.
[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol display mode effects A, B, and D of FIGS. 116, 117, and 119, in the second display mode, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the first direction (horizontal direction). , The horizontal line LN1) is displayed side by side along the inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle, but the second direction is not limited to such a direction and is different from the first direction. It can be in any direction.
[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol display mode effects A, B, and D of FIGS. 116, 117, and 119, in the second display mode, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the first direction (horizontal direction). , The horizontal line LN1) is displayed side by side along the inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle, but the inclined angle of the inclined line LN2 can be freely set.
[Modification example 4]
In the decorative symbol display mode effects A and B of FIGS. 116 and 117, the predetermined condition for changing from the first display mode to the second display mode reaches a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) in the jackpot game. However, the predetermined conditions are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.
[Modification 5]
In the decorative symbol display mode effect of FIGS. 116 to 119, the decorative symbols are arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1) in the first display mode, and in the second direction (inclined line LN2) in the second display mode. The movable accessory arranged along the line is the second movable accessory 15, but even if it is the first movable accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L, right movable accessory 14R) or other movable accessory. Good.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
A first display mode in which a plurality of the decorative symbols are displayed side by side along a first direction, and a plurality of the decorative symbols are displayed side by side in a second direction different from the first direction. The second display mode is feasible.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2.
The predetermined condition is that the number of fluctuations reaches the predetermined number of times in the jackpot game.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3.
Further equipped with a first movable accessory configured to be movable,
The first movable accessory is arranged along the first direction in the first display mode, and is arranged along the second direction in the second display mode.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4.
A second movable accessory that is configured to be movable,
Further equipped with a third movable accessory configured to be movable,
At the time of a big hit, the second movable accessory and the third movable accessory are united at a predetermined position and arranged along the first direction, and then the second movable object in the combined state. The accessory and the third movable accessory rotate and are arranged along the second direction.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-5.
At the time of the jackpot, the first movable accessory is arranged along the same direction as the second movable accessory and the third movable accessory.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. This decorative symbol variation effect can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10. This decorative pattern variation effect is an effect that performs a variation effect different from the normal decorative pattern variation effect. In the normal variation effect of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern fluctuates downward.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect A. In the decorative symbol variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), an effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In the effect before the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol change, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), the left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8L moves from the variation start position to the right where the decorative symbol 8C is located, and fluctuates so as to collide with (contact) the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative symbol 8C. The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), the effect of starting the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol is performed. In this intermediate decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8C moves to the right where the decorative symbol 8R is located from the variation start position based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8L collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8C. It is a production that fluctuates so as to hit (touch). In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (D), the right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8R fluctuates so as to move to the right based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8C collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8R. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R moves to the right by a predetermined distance and then temporarily stops at that location. Instead of temporarily stopping at that location, the vehicle may move in a predetermined direction (for example, the left direction opposite to the moving direction).

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (E), a loss display effect is performed. In this loss display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the above left decorative symbol change start effect, middle decorative symbol change start effect, and right decorative symbol change start effect are instantly converted to other symbols and confirmed. Display a stop. In the example of the figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were the symbols of "5 6 7", are converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. In the decorative symbol variation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), an effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In the effect before the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol change, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8L moves from the variation start position while rotating to the right where the decorative symbol 8C is located, and fluctuates so as to hit (contact) the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative symbol 8C. The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the intermediate decoration symbol variation start effect is performed. In this intermediate decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8C moves from the variation start position while rotating to the right where the decorative symbol 8R is located, based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8L collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8C. It is an effect that fluctuates so as to hit (contact) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), the right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8R fluctuates so as to move while rotating in the right direction based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8C collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8R. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R moves to the right by a predetermined distance and then temporarily stops at that location. Instead of temporarily stopping at that location, the vehicle may move in a predetermined direction (for example, the left direction opposite to the moving direction).

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (E), a loss display effect is performed. In this loss display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the above left decorative symbol change start effect, middle decorative symbol change start effect, and right decorative symbol change start effect are instantly converted to other symbols and confirmed. Display a stop. In the example of the figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were the symbols of "5 6 7", are converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production C]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. In the decorative symbol variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), an effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In the effect before the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol change, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8L moves from the variation start position while rotating to the right where the decorative symbol 8C is located, and fluctuates so as to hit (contact) the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, after the decorative symbol 8L collides with the decorative symbol 8C, an explosion image ZD1 showing the state of explosion is displayed, and the decorative symbol 8L explodes and is temporarily stopped at the place. The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), the intermediate decoration symbol variation start effect is performed. In this intermediate decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8C moves from the variation start position while rotating to the right where the decorative symbol 8R is located, based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8L collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8C. It is an effect that fluctuates so as to hit (contact) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, after the decorative symbol 8C collides with the decorative symbol 8R, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the decorative symbol 8C explodes and temporarily stops at the place.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8R fluctuates so as to move while rotating in the right direction based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8C collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8R. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R moves to the right by a predetermined distance, then the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R explodes and temporarily stops at that location. Instead of temporarily stopping at that location, the vehicle may move in a predetermined direction (for example, the left direction opposite to the moving direction).

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), a loss display effect is performed. In this loss display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the above left decorative symbol change start effect, middle decorative symbol change start effect, and right decorative symbol change start effect are instantly converted to other symbols and confirmed. Display a stop. In the example of the figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were the symbols of "5 6 7", are converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production D]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. In the decorative symbol variation effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In the effect before the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol change, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), the left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8L is rotated at the variation start position, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the state of explosion is shown. The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), the left decorative pattern sublimation effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol sublimation effect, after the decorative symbol 8L explodes, it flies (moves) upward while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (D), the effect of starting the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol is performed. In this intermediate decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8C is rotated at the variation start position, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the state of explosion is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), the sublimation effect of the intermediate decorative pattern is performed. In this sublimation effect of the decorative pattern, after the decorative pattern 8L explodes, it flies (moves) upward while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (F), the right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8R is rotated at the variation start position, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the state of explosion is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (G), the right decorative pattern sublimation effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol sublimation effect, after the decorative symbol 8L explodes, it flies (moves) upward while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (F), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a high-speed reach display. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, the character ARA performs various effects. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the reach effect, and a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, etc. may be performed.

In the decorative symbol variation effects A to D, the same variation is performed from the left decorative symbol variation start effect to the reach effect. It should be noted that these effects may be performed with different fluctuations instead of the same fluctuation. For example, the left decorative symbol variation start effect, the middle decorative symbol variation start effect, and the right decorative symbol variation start effect may be performed with different variations.

[Modification example]
In the decorative symbol variation effect D, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are designed to fly upward, but they may fly in a direction different from the upward direction, or each may fly in a different direction. You can go. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect D, the order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fly upward is the order of the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R, but the order is not limited to this. The order may be various, such as decorative symbol 8C, decorative symbol 8R, and decorative symbol 8L.
In the decorative symbol variation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are converted to different symbols after all three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Not limited to this, if the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, it may be converted to a different symbol before the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates, and if the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, a different symbol may be converted before the decorative symbol 8R fluctuates. May be converted to.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol 8L moves in the direction of the decorative symbol 8C and collides with the decorative symbol 8C to start the variation of the decorative symbol 8C. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a new variation pattern of the decorative pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol 8L explodes when it moves in the direction of the decorative symbol 8C and collides with the decorative symbol 8C. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 8C and improve the interest of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol variation effect, after the decorative symbol 8L moves in the direction of the decorative symbol 8C and explodes when it hits the decorative symbol 8C, the decorative symbol 8L different from that before the explosion is stopped at the explosion position. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the suspension of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 8L and improve the interest of the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol 8R is displayed before the effect that the decorative symbols 8L and 8C start to change, the effect that the decorative symbol 8C collides with the decorative symbol 8R, and the decorative symbol 8C starts to change. In the effect that the decorative symbol 8R starts to fluctuate after the effect of the decorative symbol 8R collides with the decorative symbol 8R, and the decorative symbol 8R starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbol 8C is the decorative symbol. In the production of colliding with 8R, the decorative symbol 8C is performed by colliding with the decorative symbol 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 8R and improve the interest of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation effect, in the effect in which the decorative symbol 8C collides with the decorative symbol 8R, the decorative symbol 8C explodes when it collides with the decorative symbol 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the suspension of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 8R and improve the interest of the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZD-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the first decorative pattern.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second decorative pattern.
The third display effect is an effect in which the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the first decorative symbol collides with the second decorative symbol.
The fifth display effect is an effect in which the second decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and after the first display effect and the second display effect, the third display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed. After the display effect of 3, the fourth display effect is performed, after the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect is performed, and in the fifth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. When the first decorative symbol collides with the second decorative symbol, the variation of the second decorative symbol is started.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-2]
The gaming machine described in ZD-1.
In the combination effect, in the fourth display effect, the first decorative symbol explodes when it hits the second decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-3]
The gaming machine described in ZD-2.
In the combination effect, in the fourth display effect, after the first decorative symbol explodes, a decorative symbol different from that before the explosion is stopped at the explosion position.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of ZD-1 to ZD-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed, and as one of the plurality of display effects, a seventh display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, an eighth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of displaying a third decorative pattern.
The seventh display effect is an effect in which the second decorative symbol collides with the third decorative symbol.
The eighth display effect is an effect in which the third decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.
The combination effect includes the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, the sixth display effect, and the seventh display effect. In some cases, the display effect of the above and the eighth display effect may be included.
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed before the third display effect and the fifth display effect, and the seventh display effect is performed after the fifth display effect. The eighth display effect is performed after the seventh display effect, and in the eighth display effect, the second decorative symbol collides with the third decorative symbol in the seventh display effect. As a result, the variation of the third decorative pattern is started.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-5]
The gaming machine described in ZD-4.
In the combination effect, in the seventh display effect, the second decorative symbol explodes when it hits the third decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ The first decorative pattern rotates and crushes the second decorative pattern.
○ Assuming that the direction in which the first decorative symbol collides with the second decorative symbol is the first direction, if the first decorative symbol fluctuates in a second direction different from the first direction after the explosion, A predetermined production (reach production) is performed. In this case, it fluctuates in a direction different from that during normal fluctuation.

Pseudo-continuous effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. Pseudo-ream effects A to D are examples of different configurations of the temporary stop effects in the pseudo-ream. This pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the pseudo continuous effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10.

[Pseudo-continuous production A]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), the combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, the message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L1, "5" is stopped at the lower stage of the left effect symbol 8L, and "5" is stopped at the upper stage of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (E), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L2, "8" is stopped in the upper row of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C, and "8" is stopped in the lower row of the right effect symbol 8R.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (F), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the transition from FIG. 124 (F) to FIG. 124 (C) is performed, and the temporary stop effect and the revariation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. In addition, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the revariation effect and the variation time from the revariation effect to the temporary stop effect become shorter. The shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot.

When the predetermined time elapses (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 124 (G). Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Pseudo-continuous production B]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, the message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L1, "5" is stopped at the lower stage of the left effect symbol 8L, and "5" is stopped at the upper stage of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (E), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by line L2, the special symbol "Speed Up" is stopped in the upper row of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C, and the special symbol "Speed Up" is stopped in the lower row of the right effect symbol 8R. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the transition from FIG. 125 (F) to FIG. 125 (C) is performed, and the temporary stop effect and the revariation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. Further, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened by arranging the special symbols "Speed Up" on the predetermined line. The shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot.

When the predetermined time elapses (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 125 (G). Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Pseudo-continuous production C]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), the combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, the message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop with the same color combination. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "0", the middle effect symbol 8C is "4", the right effect symbol 8R is "6", and these effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are all blue. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (E), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop with the same color combination. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is "1", the right effect symbol 8R is "9", and these effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are all red. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the transition from FIG. 126 (F) to FIG. 126 (C) is performed, and the temporary stop effect and the revariation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. In addition, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect become shorter. In addition, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of a specific color (for example, red) are aligned, the interval time and the fluctuation time may be shortened. The shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot.

When the predetermined time elapses (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 126 (G). Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Pseudo-continuous production D]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, the message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the special symbol "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continue", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the special symbol "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "8", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continue", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the transition from FIG. 127 (F) to FIG. 127 (C) is performed, and the temporary stop effect and the revariation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. In addition, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect become shorter. The shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot.

When the predetermined time elapses (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 127 (G). Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pseudo-continuous production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the continuous combo is entered, the temporary stop effect and the revariation effect are repeated until the continuous combo period ends (FIGS. 124 (B) to (F), 125 (B)). ~ (F), FIGS. 126 (B) to (F), FIGS. 127 (B) to (F)). Moreover, the repetition time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the fluctuation again with a temporary stop is shortened. According to this configuration, the pseudo-ream continues in a certain period, and the interval between the repetitions of the pseudo-ream becomes shorter, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect become shorter. According to this configuration, since the repetition interval of the pseudo-ream becomes shorter, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the temporary stop effect, a configuration in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in a predetermined arrangement is illustrated (FIGS. 124 (C) (F) and 125 (C) (F). )). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the repetition of the pseudo-ream, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a configuration in which a special symbol is temporarily stopped is illustrated in the temporary stop effect (FIGS. 125 (E) and 127 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the repetition of the pseudo-ream, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the temporary stop effect, a configuration in which the repetition time is shortened by temporarily stopping the special symbol is illustrated (FIG. 125 (E)). According to this configuration, the change in the repetition time becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the shorter the repetition time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot. According to this configuration, the repetition of the pseudo-ren becomes interesting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pseudo-continuous production.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the configuration for shortening the repetition time of the pseudo-ream repeated in a predetermined period has been described, but the configuration may be such that the repetition time of the pseudo-ream is lengthened. Alternatively, it may be configured to be longer or shorter.

[Modification 2]
In the above, both the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the fluctuation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened, but at least one of the interval time and the fluctuation time is shortened. It may be a configuration that goes on.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
It is a gaming machine capable of executing a repetitive pseudo-ream effect in which the effect symbol that has started the fluctuation is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-ream that starts the fluctuation again is repeated for a predetermined period.
The repetitive pseudo-continuous effect is a game machine characterized in that the repetitive time from when the effect symbol starts to fluctuate to when the effect symbol starts to fluctuate again through the temporary stop changes within the predetermined period.

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
The repetitive pseudo-continuous effect is a fluctuation time, which is a time from the start of the fluctuation to the temporary stop, and a time from the temporary stop to the start of the fluctuation, which constitutes the repetition time. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the interval times changes.

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
In the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, a game machine characterized in that the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in a predetermined arrangement.

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3.
In the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, a gaming machine characterized in that a special symbol among the effect symbols may be temporarily stopped.

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-4.
In the repetitive pseudo-ream effect, a game machine characterized in that the repetitive time changes due to a temporary stop of the special symbol.

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5.
In the repetitive pseudo-continuous production, the greater the change in the repetitive time, the greater the expectation for the jackpot.

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6.
The feature is that the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect can be performed on the display screen of the first display device, and the hold image corresponding to the hold storage can be displayed on the display screen of the second display device different from the first display device. A game machine to play.

The decorative design facing effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131. This decorative symbol facing effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Decorative design facing production A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect A. In the decorative symbol facing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), a low-speed variation effect of the decorative symbol is performed. In this low-speed fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol 8L fluctuates at a low speed (low speed movement) in the downward direction, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R change at a low speed (low speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R fluctuate upward at the same speed in a lined state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, which have been fluctuating at low speed, are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols". In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop displays of "7 8 8", indicating a chance eye (chance up display) in which the jackpot expectation is increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the decorative pattern re-variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are again displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, the character CRZE performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative design facing production B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect B. In the decorative symbol facing effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), a low-speed variation effect of the decorative symbol is performed. In this low-speed fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol 8L fluctuates at a low speed (low speed movement) in the downward direction, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R change at a low speed (low speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates upward at a lower speed than the decorative symbol 8R. Not limited to this, the decorative symbol 8R may fluctuate upward at a lower speed than the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, which have been fluctuating at low speed, are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols". In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop displays of "7 8 8", indicating a chance eye (chance up display) in which the jackpot expectation is increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (D), the decorative symbol revariation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are again displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, the character CRZE performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative design facing production C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect C. In the decorative symbol facing effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), a low-speed variation effect of the decorative symbol is performed. In this low-speed fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol 8L fluctuates at a low speed (low speed movement) in the downward direction, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R change at a low speed (low speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates upward at a lower speed than the decorative symbol 8R. Not limited to this, the decorative symbol 8R may fluctuate upward at a lower speed than the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R, which have been fluctuating at low speed, are stopped and displayed at a position different from the reach line LN. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed slightly above the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols". In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop displays of "7 8 8", indicating a chance eye (chance up display) in which the jackpot expectation is increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (D), the decorative symbol revariation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are again displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, the character CRZE performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative design facing production D]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect D. In the decorative symbol facing effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), a low-speed variation effect of the decorative symbol is performed. In this low-speed fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol 8L fluctuates at a low speed (low speed movement) in the downward direction, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R change at a low speed (low speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates upward at a lower speed than the decorative symbol 8R. Not limited to this, the decorative symbol 8R may fluctuate upward at a lower speed than the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R, which have fluctuated at a low speed, are stopped and displayed at a position different from the reach line LN. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed in parallel slightly above the reach line LN. Further, in this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance-up symbol. This chance-up symbol is a symbol that was not included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R were fluctuating at the time of the decorative symbol variation effect, and this decorative symbol temporary stop effect. At times, it is a symbol included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. When this chance-up symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a so-called chance eye (chance-up display), indicating that the jackpot expectation level has increased. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols".

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (D), the decorative symbol revariation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are again displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, the character CRZE performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Modification example]
In the above decorative symbol facing effect, the decorative symbols 8L are variablely displayed downward, at that time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variablely displayed upward, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. The effect of the above may be repeated a plurality of times, and the higher the number of repetitions, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern facing effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol facing effect, the decorative symbols 8L are variablely displayed downward, at that time, the decorative symbols 8C are variablely displayed upward, and then the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the variable effect in which the decorative symbols move in opposite directions (opposite directions) is performed, it is possible to dynamically perform the variable effect such that the decorative symbols are separated or approached in the variable effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol facing effect, a chance-up display is performed depending on the stop mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, after the dynamic variation effect, a chance-up display that is advantageous for the player is performed, so that the player can be continuously given a hobby until the decorative pattern stops from the variation effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol facing effect, the decorative symbols 8L are variablely displayed downward, at that time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variablely displayed upward, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the variable effect in which the decorative symbols move in opposite directions (opposite directions) is performed, it is possible to dynamically perform the variable effect such that the decorative symbols are separated or approached in the variable effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol facing effect, the decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed downward, and at that time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variablely displayed upward, but the moving speeds of the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R are different. According to this configuration, a dynamic variation effect can be performed by the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8C. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above decorative symbol facing effect, the decorative symbols 8L are variablely displayed downward, at that time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variablely displayed upward, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. The effect of is repeated multiple times, and the greater the number of repetitions, the higher the expectation of a big hit. According to this configuration, the more the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate, the more happy the player is, so that the interest of the variable effect using the decorative symbols can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZE-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the first decorative pattern in the first direction.
The second display effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the second decorative symbol in the second direction opposite to the first direction.
The third display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZE-1.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, chance-up display is performed by a stop display mode including the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZE-1 or the aspect ZE-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the third decorative pattern in the second direction.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZE-3.
The speed of moving in the second direction is different between the second decorative symbol in the second display effect and the third decorative symbol in the fourth display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZE-1 to ZE-4.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and then a series of effects in which the third display effect is performed are repeated a plurality of times, and the number of repetitions. The more you have, the higher your expectation for big hits.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ In the case of a jackpot, a jackpot symbol array including the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be formed on a predetermined line, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be formed in the third display effect. At least one of the decorative symbols of is not stopped and displayed on a predetermined line.
○ In the third display effect, the first decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed is a decorative symbol that is not included in the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed during the first display effect.

The decorative symbol look-ahead display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135. This decorative symbol look-ahead display effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during the pseudo-continuous effect), during the jackpot game, and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the pending change suggestion image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 or the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R).

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect A]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect A. In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-read display effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 132 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AZ will be described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Further, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the loss mode "472". .. The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the images representing the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are "red". , The image representing the numbers "2", "4", "6", "8" is "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 132C, shift movement of the hold icon 9A by hold digestion is performed in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the third hold. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ on which the specific image is represented is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image, and the whole is represented by "red". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the "red" images representing the numbers "3" and "5" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are "pre-reading effects. The image is "red", and one of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) is stopped and displayed as a specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ during the previous variation. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specified medium decorative symbol 8CZ, a "red" image representing the number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "red", and two of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (G), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold moves to the right (shift movement) by one, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is performed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the specified medium decorative symbol 8CZ, and the specific right decorative symbol 8RZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed. To. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ during the previous variation. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. It is a "red" image and is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9CZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to produce a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that has been pre-read. ) Is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 132 (J), the state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the jackpot mode “777” is shown. The pre-reading effect described above suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect B]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect B. In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-read display effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 133 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AZ will be described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Further, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the loss mode "472". .. The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the images representing the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are "red". , The image representing the numbers "2", "4", "6", "8" is "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (C), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the third hold. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ on which the specific image is represented is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is an image that combines a smiling face image and a square image with the characters "chance" under the smiling face image, and the whole Is represented by "red". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the "red" images representing the numbers "3" and "5" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are "pre-reading effects. The image is "red", and one of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) is stopped and displayed as a specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ during the previous variation. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specified medium decorative symbol 8CZ, a "red" image representing the number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "red", and two of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (G), in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A by hold digestion is performed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold moves to the right (shift movement) by one, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is performed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the specified medium decorative symbol 8CZ, and the specific right decorative symbol 8RZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed. To. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ during the previous variation. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. It is a "red" image and is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (I), the shift movement of the hold icon 9A by the hold digestion is performed in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9CZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to produce a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that has been pre-read. ) Is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 133 (J), the state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the jackpot mode “777” is shown. The pre-reading effect described above suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual. In addition, it should be noted

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect C]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect C. In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-read display effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 134 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AZ will be described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Further, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the loss mode "472". .. The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the images representing the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are "red". , The image representing the numbers "2", "4", "6", "8" is "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (C), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the third hold. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ on which the specific image is represented is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image, and the whole is represented by "blue". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the "blue" images representing the numbers "8" and "6" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the fluctuation three times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "blue", and one of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) is stopped and displayed as a specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ during the previous variation. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specified medium decorative symbol 8CZ, a "blue" image representing the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "blue", and two of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (G), in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A by hold digestion is performed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold moves to the right (shift movement) by one, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is performed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the specified medium decorative symbol 8CZ, and the specific right decorative symbol 8RZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed. To. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ during the previous variation. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. It is a "blue" image and is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9CZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to produce a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that has been pre-read. ) Is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 134 (J), the state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the jackpot mode “777” is shown. The pre-reading effect described above suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect D]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect D. In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-read display effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 135 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AZ will be described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Further, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the loss mode "472". .. The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the images representing the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are "red". , The image representing the numbers "2", "4", "6", "8" is "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 135C, shift movement of the hold icon 9A by hold digestion is performed in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the third hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the specific images are represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ in which the first specific image is represented and the specific intermediate decorative symbol in which the second specific image is represented 8CZ and the specific right decorative symbol 8RZ are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image representing a specific object. The first specific image is an image in which a smiling face image and a square image in which the characters "chance" are inserted under the smiling face image are combined, and the whole is represented by "red". The second specific image is a smiling face image, which is entirely represented by "red". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. It is a "red" image, and one of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) is stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol representing the first specific image, and the remaining two decorative symbols (middle decorative symbol 8C) are displayed. , Right decorative symbol 8R) is stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol on which the second specific image is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the specific images are represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ representing the first specific image, the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ, and the second specific image are displayed. The specified right decorative symbol 8RZ is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this way, during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "red", and two of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol representing the first specific image, and the remaining one decorative symbol is displayed. (Right decorative symbol 8R) is stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol on which the second specific image is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (G), in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A by hold digestion is performed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold moves to the right (shift movement) by one, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is performed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the specific images are represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the specific middle decorative symbol 8CZ, and the specific right decorative symbol 8RZ on which the first specific image is represented are provisionally. Stop is displayed. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "red", and the first specific image is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R shift the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9CZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to produce a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that has been pre-read. ) Is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 135 (J), the state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the jackpot mode “777” is shown. The pre-reading effect described above suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C,) which is a combination of decorative symbols of the same type by pre-reading during fluctuation. It is possible to execute the first effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect. The degree of expectation of winning differs depending on the type of decorative pattern constituting 8R). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed. A set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R), which is a combination of the same types of decorative symbols as (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R), is temporarily stopped. The displayed second effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of sets that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed. A set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that is a combination of the same type of decorative symbols as the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) It is possible to execute the third effect that is temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, after the first effect, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is used to win. , Or, a fixed stop display is displayed to notify the disconnection. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect. Is a combination of decorative patterns of the same color (blue, red). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect. Is a combination of decorative symbols of the first color (blue) and a combination of decorative symbols of the second color (red) different from the first color (blue). When the set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is a combination of the second color (red) decorative symbols, the first color (blue) decorative symbol The degree of expectation is higher than when it is a combination.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect of FIGS. 132 to 135, the look-ahead effect during the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ three times, two times, and one time before is performed. For example, the specific hold icon 9AZ is performed. The look-ahead effect during the change two times before and one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ may be performed, or the look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ may be performed. ..
[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect of FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol) which is a combination of decorative symbols of the same color is used as a changing look-ahead effect corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is temporarily stopped and displayed, but this set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is decorated with the same figures, patterns, patterns, characters, etc. It may be a combination of symbols.
[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect of FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle) which is a combination of the same blue or red decorative symbols as the changing look-ahead effect corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. The decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is temporarily stopped and displayed, but the color of the decorative symbol may be a color other than blue or red.
[Modification example 4]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect D of FIG. 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol) which is a combination of decorative symbols having the same red color but different image types as the changing look-ahead effect corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is temporarily stopped, but at least one of the plurality of types is a combination of the same decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle). Decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) may be used.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
It is possible to execute the first effect in which the set of decorative symbols, which is a combination of the same type of decorative symbols, is temporarily stopped and displayed by pre-reading during the fluctuation.
The degree of expectation of winning differs depending on the type of decorative symbols constituting the set of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1.
The set of decorative symbols that is a combination of the same type of decorative symbols as the set of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed. Is possible to execute the second effect in which is temporarily stopped and displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1 or aspect C5-2.
The set of decorative symbols that is a combination of the same type of decorative symbols as the set of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the variation immediately before the variation in which the first effect is executed. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3.
After the first effect, the set of decorative symbols makes a definite stop display for notifying the hit or miss.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4.
The set of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect is a combination of decorative symbols of the same color.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-5.
The set of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect is a combination of decorative symbols of the first color and a combination of decorative symbols of a second color different from the first color. There are cases where there is
When the set of decorative symbols is a combination of the decorative symbols of the second color, the degree of expectation for hitting is higher than that of the combination of the decorative symbols of the first color.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. This decorative pattern look-ahead effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol look-ahead effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the device 7 or the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol look-ahead effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R). Change the position and tilt of.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead production A]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect A. In the decorative symbol look-ahead effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead effect in which the specific hold icon 9AT, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 136A, the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AT will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 136 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 136 (A) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at "789", and then the hold icon 9C disappears (holds and digests). As shown in FIG. 136 (B), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

As shown in FIG. 136 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is performed in the order of symbol 8R and intermediate decorative symbol 8C. At this time,
By pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the third hold, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the specific image is represented is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the images showing the numbers (here, "2" and "6") are temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, one decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) is stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L. , Right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, an image showing a number (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one to the right to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L. , Right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, and the specified medium decorative symbol 8CT, each of which represents a specific image, are temporarily stopped. Is displayed. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT during the previous variation. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (H), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R. To. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of pre-reading is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG. Is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a smiling face image, and this corresponding image CRG is also a smiling face image. The corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may represent the content of the specific image in characters, or may be a deformed shape of the specific image. The corresponding image CRG may be moved. After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 136 (J), a state in which a fixed stop is displayed in a jackpot mode is shown. The pre-reading effect described above suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead production B]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect B. In the decorative symbol look-ahead effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead effect in which the specific hold icon 9AT, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 137 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AT will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 137 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 137 (A) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at “789”, and then the hold icon 9C disappears (holds and digests). As shown in FIG. 137 (B), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

As shown in FIG. 137 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is performed in the order of symbol 8R and intermediate decorative symbol 8C. At this time,
By pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the third hold, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the specific image is represented is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT. This specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here, a part on the left side of the smiling face image is represented. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the specific image displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is also referred to as a "first specific image". After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the images showing the numbers (here, "2" and "6") are temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on one decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L. , Right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols representing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the first specific image is displayed and the specific right decoration on which the second specific image is displayed. The symbol 8RT is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. The second specific image represents a part of the right side of the smiling face image. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, an image showing a number (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) shifts the hold icon 9A by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one to the right to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L. , Right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols representing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the first specific image is displayed and the specific right decoration on which the second specific image is displayed The symbol 8RT and the specified intermediate decorative symbol 8CT on which the third specific image is displayed are temporarily stopped and displayed. The first specific image and the second specific image are the same as those represented by the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT during the previous variation. The third specific image represents a central part of the smiling face image. By arranging the first specific image, the second specific image, and the third specific image, it becomes one smiling face image. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (H), in the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R. To. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of pre-reading is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG. Is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a smiling face image, and the corresponding image CRG is a character image represented as "smile !!!". As described above, the corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image and may not be the same as the specific image. After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 137 (J) shows a state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the mode of a jackpot. The pre-reading effect described above suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead production C]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect C. In the decorative symbol look-ahead effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead effect in which the specific hold icon 9AT, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 138 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AT will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 138 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 138 (A) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at “789”, and then the hold icon 9C disappears (holds and digests). As shown in FIG. 138 (B), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

As shown in FIG. 138 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is performed in the order of symbol 8R and intermediate decorative symbol 8C. At this time,
By pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the third hold, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the specific image is represented is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT. This specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here, it is a character image representing the "ma" of hiragana. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the specific image displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is also referred to as a "first specific image". After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the images showing the numbers (here, "2" and "6") are temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on one decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L. , Right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols representing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the first specific image is displayed and the specific right decoration on which the second specific image is displayed. The symbol 8RT is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. The second specific image is a character image representing the "ka" of hiragana. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, an image showing a number (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one to the right to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L. , Right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols representing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the first specific image is displayed and the specific right decoration on which the second specific image is displayed The symbol 8RT and the specified intermediate decorative symbol 8CT on which the third specific image is displayed are temporarily stopped and displayed. The first specific image and the second specific image are the same as those represented by the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT during the previous variation. The third specific image is a character image representing the "sa" of hiragana. By arranging the first specific image, the second specific image, and the third specific image, the word has one meaning of "no way". After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (H), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R. To. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of pre-reading is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG. Is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a character image of "No way", and this corresponding image CRG is a character image represented by "No way !!!". The corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be characters having the same meaning as the contents of the specific image, or may be converted into Roman characters or katakana by changing the font. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 138 (J), a state in which a fixed stop is displayed in a jackpot mode is shown. The pre-reading effect described above suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead effect D]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect D. In the decorative symbol look-ahead effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead effect in which the specific hold icon 9AT, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 139 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AT will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 139 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 139 (A) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at "789", and then the hold icon 9C disappears (holds and digests). As shown in FIG. 139 (B), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

As shown in FIG. 139 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8R and intermediate decorative symbol 8C. At this time,
By pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the third hold, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the specific image is represented is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT. This specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here, it is a character image representing "No way !!!". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the images showing the numbers (here, "2" and "6") are temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific image is displayed on one decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L. , Right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, an image showing a number (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one to the right to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L. , Right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, and the specified medium decorative symbol 8CT on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped. Will be done. This specific image is the same as the one temporarily stopped and displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT during the previous variation. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (H), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R. To. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of pre-reading is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG. Is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a character image representing "No way !!!", and this corresponding image CRG is also a character image representing "No way !!!". The corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be characters having the same meaning as the contents of the specific image, or may be converted into Roman characters or katakana by changing the font. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 139 (J), a state in which a fixed stop is displayed in a jackpot mode is shown. The pre-reading effect described above suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern look-ahead effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, a specific decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as at least one decorative symbol in a set of decorative symbols by pre-reading during fluctuation. It is possible to execute the first effect and the second effect in which the corresponding image CRG corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative symbol is displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead after the first effect. it can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, a specific decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed. It is possible to execute a third effect in which a number of specific decorative symbols larger than the number of is temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, during the variation immediately before the variation in which the first effect is executed, the temporary stop display is displayed in the first effect. It is possible to execute the fourth effect in which a number of specific decorative symbols smaller than the number of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, after the second effect, a fixed stop display for notifying a hit or miss is made by a set of decorative symbols. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 to 139, the specific decorative symbol includes an image representing a predetermined character, and in the second effect, the content is the same as that of the predetermined character. The image is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, in the third effect, all of the set of decorative symbols become specific decorative symbols and are temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern look-ahead effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D, the number of specific decorative symbols is increased by one, such as "0", "1", "2", and "3", for each variable effect. However, the number of specific decorative symbols may be increased in any way. For example, after FIG. 138 (B), FIG. 138 (E) may be executed without executing FIGS. 138 (C) (D). In this case, the number of specific decorative symbols increases to "0", "2", and "3". Further, after FIG. 138 (B), FIG. 138 (G) may be executed without executing FIGS. 138 (C) to (F). In this case, the number of specific decorative symbols increases to "0" and "3". The same applies to FIGS. 136, 137, and 139.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D, the look-ahead effect of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 has been described, but the decorative symbol look-ahead effect may be executed as the look-ahead effect of the hold icon 9B corresponding to the special figure 2. ..

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D, the content of the specific image may be changed depending on the difference in the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, the method of the look-ahead effect of FIG. 137 may have a higher expectation of a big hit than the look-ahead effect of FIG. 136.

[Modification example 4]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D, the specific decorative symbol does not have to be displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol. For example, the specific decorative symbol is first displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol, and in the next variation, the intermediate decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol become the specific decorative symbol, and finally, all three become the specific decorative symbols. May be good.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D, the effect may end in the middle. For example, after FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (F), FIG. 138 (A) may be executed again instead of FIG. 138 (G).

[Modification 6]
The contents of the decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
A first effect in which a specific decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as at least one decorative symbol in the set of decorative symbols by pre-reading during fluctuation.
After the first effect, a second effect in which an image corresponding to the image represented by the specific decorative symbol is displayed during the variation corresponding to the look-ahead can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1.
During the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed, the number of the specific decorative symbols that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect is larger than the number of the specific decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed. 3 effects can be executed,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1 or aspect C6-2.
During the variation immediately before the variation in which the first effect is executed, the number of the specific decorative symbols that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect is smaller than the number of the specific decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed. The fourth production is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3.
After the second effect, the set of decorative symbols makes a fixed stop display for notifying the hit or miss.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-4.
The specific decorative pattern includes an image representing a predetermined character.
In the second effect, an image having the same content as the predetermined character is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-2.
In the third effect, all of the set of decorative symbols become the specific decorative symbols and are temporarily stopped and displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation image tilt display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. This operation image tilt display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation image tilt display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image is read. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 or the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation image tilt display effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R ) Change the position and inclination.

[Operation image tilt display effect A]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect A. In the operation image tilt display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the opening image OPG showing "Erase smile !!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect as to whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of the decorative symbol, and the sub-display device 10 may display the hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 140 (B), when the game effect is started, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are the same image, but may be different images (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). When the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed, the inclinations of the images are different from each other. After that, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. Move so that the display position changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), the switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific image TGs are simultaneously switched to the button image BTN. Specifically, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 emit light at the same time, and the first effect image EF1 and the second effect image EF2 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (E), when the first effect image EF1 and the second effect image EF2 disappear, the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are simultaneously displayed at the positions, respectively. .. That is, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 emit light at the same time and are switched to the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 all at once (simultaneously). The first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are images showing the appearance of the effect button 63, respectively, and are the same images here. When the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed at the same time, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2. Therefore, when the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed at the same time, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states. The first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 may have different image sizes or different image shapes. When the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are in a state in which the tilts of the images are different from each other. It is displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the tilt of the image changes while maintaining it. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (F), the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. Move so that the display position changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (G), after the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 stop at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, "hit" in the center of the display screen 7a. The operation promotion image SPG showing "!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SPG is an image in which the operation valid period of the effect button 63 is currently in effect and the player is recommended to operate the effect button 63. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the effect of extinguishing the button image is executed as shown in FIGS. 140 (H) and 140 (I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7. Here, the button image BTN explodes one by one in order according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and switches to the explosion image EX. Here, first, the second button image BTN2 is switched to the second explosion image EX2, and then the first button image BTN1 is switched to the first explosion image EX1. After the explosion image EX is displayed, the smoke image KM representing the smoke after the explosion is displayed, and then the display disappears from the main display device 7. In FIG. 140 (I), the second smoke image KM2 is displayed after the second explosion image EX2. In this way, the button images BTN explode one by one according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and when all of them explode, three decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (J). Is displayed, and then stopped. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit. In addition, the decorative design may be stopped and displayed in the form of loss.

[Operation image tilt display effect B]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect B. In the operation image tilt display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the opening image OPG showing "Erase smile !!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect as to whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of the decorative symbol, and the sub-display device 10 may display the hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 141 (B), when the game effect is started, the first specific image TG1, the second specific image TG2, the third specific image TG3, and the fourth are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG4 and is displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are all the same image, but may be different images (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). When the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are displayed, the inclinations of the images are randomly displayed differently. After that, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes randomly.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 141 (C) to 141 (E), the switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific image TGs are randomly switched to the button image BTN or the select button image SKB. Here, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), the second specific image TG2 and the third specific image TG3 are simultaneously (simultaneously) switched to the second select button image SKB2 and the third button image BTN3. The second select button image SKB2 is an image showing the appearance of the select button 68. The third button image BTN3 is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. When the second select button image SKB2 and the third button image BTN3 are displayed at the same time, the inclinations of the images are displayed in different states.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the first specific image TG1 is switched to the first button image BTN1. The first button image BTN1 is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is the same image as the third button image BTN3. When the first button image BTN1 is displayed, the inclination of the image is displayed in a state different from that of the third button image BTN3. Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (E), the fourth specific image TG4 is switched to the fourth select button image SKB4. The fourth select button image SKB4 is an image showing the appearance of the select button 68, and is the same image as the second select button image SKB2. When the fourth select button image SKB4 is displayed, the inclination of the image is displayed in a state different from that of the second select button image SKB2. The first button image BTN1, the second select button image SKB2, the third button image BTN3, and the fourth select button image SKB4 are stopped and displayed in a state in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. It should be noted that these may be displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other without being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), the operation promotion image SPG represented by "Strike !!" is displayed above the display screen 7a. The operation promotion image SPG is an image in which the operation valid period of the effect button 63 and the select button 68 is currently valid, and the player is recommended to operate the effect button 63 and the select button 68. When the effect button 63 and the select button 68 are operated by the player, the effect of extinguishing the button image is executed as shown in FIGS. 141 (G) to 141 (I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) are randomly disappeared in the main display device 7. Here, as shown in FIG. 141 (G), the select button images SKB explode all at once in response to the operation (pressing) of the select button 68, and the images are switched to the explosion images EX2 and EX4. After the explosion images EX2 and EX4 are displayed, the smoke images KM2 and KM4 representing the smoke after the explosion are displayed as shown in FIG. 141 (H), and then the display disappears from the main display device 7. Further, the button image BTN explodes one by one in order according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and switches to the explosion image EX. Here, as shown in FIG. 141 (H), the third button image BTN3 is first switched to the third explosion image EX3, and then, as shown in FIG. 141 (I), the first button image BTN1 is the first. 1 Switch to the explosion image EX1. After the explosion image EX is displayed, the smoke image KM representing the smoke after the explosion is displayed, and then the display disappears from the main display device 7. In FIG. 141 (I), the third smoke image KM3 is displayed after the third explosion image EX3. In this way, when the button image BTN and the select button image SKB explode in response to the operation (pressing) of the effect button 63 and the select button 68, and all of them explode, three decorations are displayed as shown in FIG. 141 (J). The symbol is displayed, and then the stop is displayed. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit. In addition, the decorative design may be stopped and displayed in the form of loss.

[Operation image tilt display effect C]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect C. In the operation image tilt display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the opening image OPG showing "Erase smile !!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect as to whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of the decorative symbol, and the sub-display device 10 may display the hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 142 (B), when the game effect is started, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) are displayed. 1 specific image TG1, 2nd specific image TG2, 3rd specific image TG3, 4th specific image TG4, 5th specific image TG5, 6th specific image TG6, 7th specific image TG7, 8th The specific image TG8 and is displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are all the same image, but may be images different from each other (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, the lower side of the face image is tilted so as to face the center position of the arranged rings. In other words, when the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, the inclinations of the images are displayed differently from each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), the colors of the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 randomly change while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), the switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific image TGs are simultaneously switched to the button image BTN. Specifically, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time, and the first effect image EF1, the second effect image EF2, the third effect image EF3, the fourth effect image EF4, and the fifth effect image EF4. The effect image EF5, the sixth effect image EF6, the seventh effect image EF7, and the eighth effect image EF8 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (E), when the first to eighth effect images EF1 to EF8 disappear, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, and the third button image BTN3 are located at the positions, respectively. , The 4th button image BTN4, the 5th button image BTN5, the 6th button image BTN6, the 7th button image BTN7, and the 8th button image BTN8 are displayed at the same time. That is, the 1st to 8th specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time and are switched to the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 all at once (simultaneously). The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are images showing the appearance of the effect button 63, respectively, and are the same images here. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the corresponding first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8. Therefore, when the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 may have different image sizes or different image shapes. When the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are tilted respectively. The colors of the image change randomly while maintaining different states.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (G), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 straddle the in display device 7 and the sub display device 10 and are displayed side by side in a ring shape, and then the ring is displayed. The operation promotion image SPG with the message "Strike !!" is displayed in the center. The operation promotion image SPG is an image in which the operation valid period of the effect button 63 is currently in effect and the player is recommended to operate the effect button 63. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the effect of extinguishing the button image is executed as shown in FIGS. 142 (H) and 142 (I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7. Here, the button image BTNs arranged in a ring explode one by one in order according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and the button image BTN is switched to the explosive image EX. Here, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8. However, in order, the first explosion image EX1, the second explosion image EX2, the third explosion image EX3, the fourth explosion image EX4, the fifth explosion image EX5, the sixth explosion image EX6, the seventh explosion image EX7, and the eighth explosion. The image is switched to EX8, and the display disappears from the main display device 7 in order. In this way, the button images BTN explode one by one according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and when all of them explode, three decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 142 (J). Is displayed, and then stopped. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit. In addition, the decorative design may be stopped and displayed in the form of loss.

[Operation image tilt display effect D]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect D. In the operation image tilt display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the opening image OPG showing "Erase smile !!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect as to whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of the decorative symbol, and the sub-display device 10 may display the hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 143 (B), when the game effect is started, the first specific image TG1, the second specific image TG2, and the third specific image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The TG3, the fourth specific image TG4, the fifth specific image TG5, the sixth specific image TG6, the seventh specific image TG7, and the eighth specific image TG8 are displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are all the same image, but may be images different from each other (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. When the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, the lower side of the face image is tilted so as to face the center position of the arranged rings. In other words, when the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, the inclinations of the images are displayed differently from each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are enlarged and displayed while expanding the ring, and the images straddle the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, respectively. It is displayed in a state of being rotated to the left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), the switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific image TGs are simultaneously switched to the button image BTN. Specifically, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time, and the first effect image EF1, the second effect image EF2, the third effect image EF3, the fourth effect image EF4, and the fifth effect image EF4. The effect image EF5, the sixth effect image EF6, the seventh effect image EF7, and the eighth effect image EF8 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), when the first to eighth effect images EF1 to EF8 disappear, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, and the third button image BTN3 are located at the positions, respectively. , The 4th button image BTN4, the 5th button image BTN5, the 6th button image BTN6, the 7th button image BTN7, and the 8th button image BTN8 are displayed at the same time. That is, the 1st to 8th specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time and are switched to the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 all at once (simultaneously). The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are images showing the appearance of the effect button 63, respectively, and are the same images here. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the corresponding first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8. Therefore, when the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 may have different image sizes or different image shapes. When the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 143 (F), the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are tilted respectively. While maintaining a randomly different state, it moves while randomly rotating left and right, and the color of the image changes randomly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (G), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 straddle the in-display device 7 and the sub-display device 10 and are displayed again in a ring shape, and then the images The operation promotion image SPG with the message "Strike !!" is displayed in the center of the ring. The operation promotion image SPG is an image in which the operation valid period of the effect button 63 is currently in effect and the player is recommended to operate the effect button 63. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the effect of extinguishing the button image is executed as shown in FIGS. 143 (H) and 143 (I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7. Here, the button image BTNs arranged in a ring explode one by one in order according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and the button image BTN is switched to the explosive image EX. Here, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8. However, in order, the first explosion image EX1, the second explosion image EX2, the third explosion image EX3, the fourth explosion image EX4, the fifth explosion image EX5, the sixth explosion image EX6, the seventh explosion image EX7, and the eighth explosion. The image is switched to EX8, and the display disappears from the main display device 7 in order. In this way, the button images BTN explode one by one according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and when all of them explode, three decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 143 (J). Is displayed, and then stopped. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit. In addition, the decorative design may be stopped and displayed in the form of loss.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation image tilt display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (E), 142 (E), and 143 (E), a plurality of button image BTNs are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is possible to execute a display effect, and in this display effect, the inclinations of the plurality of button image BTNs are different from each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), a plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The display effect can be executed, and in this display effect, the inclinations of the plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) are different from each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (E), 142 (E), and 143 (E), in the display effect, a plurality of button images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The state in which the BTN is not displayed is switched to the state in which all the plurality of operating means images are displayed all at once. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 140 (C) to (E), 142 (C) to (E), and 143 (C) to (E), for example, in the display effect, the main From the state in which the plurality of specific image TGs are displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, all the plurality of specific image TGs are switched to the button image BTN all at once. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, in the display effect, the plurality of specific image TGs are displayed side by side in a ring shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 143, it is possible to execute an extinction effect in which a plurality of button image BTNs disappear in order after the display effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 143, the extinction effect is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the operation image tilt display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation image tilt display effects C to D of FIGS. 142 and 143, it has been described that the images are not displayed inside the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 arranged in a ring shape. However, the images may be displayed inside the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 arranged in a ring shape. And, for example, when the game is successful, the image may change.

[Modification 2]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the game effects when the game is successful have been described. Therefore, when the game fails, different effects may be executed. For example, in FIG. 142, when all the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are not erased within a predetermined period, the decorative symbol of the lost eye may be stopped and displayed.

[Modification 3]
The number of specific images and button images shown in the operation image tilt display effects A to D is an example, and a number of specific images and button images different from the above may be displayed.

[Modification example 4]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the disappearance effect of the button image may be executed without the player operating the effect button 63. That is, the button images may be sequentially switched to the explosion image EX without the player operating the effect button 63.

[Modification 5]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the operation promotion image SPG may be a character other than "hit !!". For example, the operation promotion image SPG may be "continuous hits !!". In addition, the opening image OPG may be characters other than "Erase Smile !!!". For example, the opening image OPG may be "Successful mission !!!".

[Modification 6]
The contents of the operation image tilt display effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the operation image tilt display effects A to D may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing the operation means.
It is possible to execute a display effect in which a plurality of the operation means images are displayed on the display means.
In the display effect, the inclinations of the plurality of operating means images are different from each other.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1.
In the display effect, the state in which the plurality of operation means images are not displayed on the display means is simultaneously switched to the state in which all the plurality of operation means images are displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target, and is
In the display effect, all the plurality of specific images are simultaneously switched to the operation means image from the state in which the plurality of the specific images are displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3.
In the display effect, the plurality of operation means images are displayed side by side in a ring shape.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4.
After the display effect, it is possible to execute an extinction effect in which the plurality of operation means images disappear in order.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-5.
The extinction effect is executed in association with the operation of the operating means by the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol button stop effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147. This decorative symbol button stop effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect A]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect A. In the decorative symbol button stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In the button display effect 1, the button image ZF1 representing the effect button 63 is displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. This button image ZF1 is displayed at a position above the variable region of the decorative symbol 8L so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8L. As a result, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8L are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), the button pressing effect 1 is performed. In this button pressing effect 1, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player pressing the effect button 63 who has seen the button image ZF1. In this figure, "6 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), the button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF1 representing the effect button 63 is displayed again while the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are changing. This button image ZF1 is displayed at a position on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8C so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8C. As a result, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8C are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), the button pressing effect 2 is performed. In this button pressing effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player sees the button image ZF1. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), the button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, the button image ZF1 representing the effect button 63 is displayed again while the decorative symbol 8R is changing. This button image ZF1 is displayed at the position of the variable region on the decorative symbol 8C so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8R. As a result, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8R are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (G), the button pressing effect 3 is performed. In the button pressing effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player sees the button image ZF1. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative symbol 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect B]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect B. In the decorative symbol button stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF1, ZF2, and ZF3 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. The button image ZF1 is displayed at a position above the variable region of the decorative symbol 8L so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8L. The button image ZF2 is displayed at a position above the variable region of the decorative symbol 8C so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8C. The button image ZF3 is displayed at a position above the variable region of the decorative symbol 8R so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8R. From these, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8L are associated with each other, the button image ZF2 and the decorative symbol 8C are associated with each other, and the button image ZF3 and the decorative symbol 8R are associated with each other. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), the button pressing effect 1 is performed. In this button pressing effect 1, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player pressing the effect button 63 who has seen the button image ZF1. In this figure, "6 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), the button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF2 and the button image ZF3 are continuously displayed on the fluctuating area of the decorative symbols 8C and 8R while the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E), the button pressing effect 2 is performed. In this button pressing effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player sees the button image ZF2. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (F), the button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, while the decorative symbol 8R is changing, the button image ZF3 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the variable area of the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (G), the button pressing effect 3 is performed. In the button pressing effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player sees the button image ZF3. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative symbol 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect C]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect C. In the decorative symbol button stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF1, ZF2, and ZF3 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. The button image ZF1 is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8L so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8L. The button image ZF2 is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8C so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8C. The button image ZF3 is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8R so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8R. From these, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8L are associated with each other, the button image ZF2 and the decorative symbol 8C are associated with each other, and the button image ZF3 and the decorative symbol 8R are associated with each other. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), the button pressing effect 1 is performed. In this button pressing effect 1, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player pressing the effect button 63 who has seen the button image ZF1. In this figure, "6 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (D), the button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF2 and the button image ZF3 are continuously displayed on the fluctuating area of the decorative symbols 8C and 8R while the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (E), the button pressing effect 2 is performed. In this button pressing effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 who has seen the button image ZF2. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (F), the button display effect 3 is performed. In the button display effect 3, the button image ZF3 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the variable area of the decorative symbol 8R while the decorative symbol 8R is changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (G), the button pressing effect 3 is performed. In the button pressing effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player sees the button image ZF3. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative symbol 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect D]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect D. In the decorative symbol button stop effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF4, ZF5, and ZF6 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. The button image ZF4 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8L so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8L. The button image ZF5 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8C so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8C. The button image ZF6 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8R so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8R. From these, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8L are associated with each other, the button image ZF2 and the decorative symbol 8C are associated with each other, and the button image ZF3 and the decorative symbol 8R are associated with each other. .. Further, the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF4 is displayed as "Ichi", the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF5 is displayed as "2", and the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF6 is "reference". Is displayed. The stop order suggestion display "Ichi" of the button image ZF4 indicates that when the effect button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed among the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The stop order suggestion display "2" of the button image ZF5 indicates that, among the fluctuating decorative symbols 8C and 8R, the corresponding decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed when the effect button 63 is pressed. The stop order suggestion display "reference" of ZF5 indicates that when the effect button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed. That is, the stop order suggestion display of the button images ZF4, ZF5, ZF6 represents the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the effect button 63 is pressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), the button pressing effect 1 is performed. In the button pressing effect 1, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player pressing the effect button 63 who has seen the button image ZF4. In this figure, "6 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), the button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF5 and the button image ZF6 are continuously displayed on the fluctuating area of the decorative symbols 8C and 8R while the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), the button pressing effect 2 is performed. In the button pressing effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player sees the button image ZF5. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), the button display effect 3 is performed. In the button display effect 3, the button image ZF6 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the variable area of the decorative symbol 8R while the decorative symbol 8R is changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), the button pressing effect 3 is performed. In the button pressing effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player sees the button image ZF6. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative symbol 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

The above-mentioned decorative pattern button stop effect is performed in the same variation. It should be noted that the decorative symbol button stop effect may be divided into a plurality of variations instead of the same variation. For example, in the decorative symbol button stop effect D, the button display effect 1, the button press effect 1 is the first variation, the button display effect 2, the button press effect 2 is the second variation, the button display effect 3, and the button press effect 3 May be performed by the third variation. Further, the decorative symbol button stop effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a look-ahead effect. Further, in the decorative symbol button stop effect, the stop mode of the decorative symbol stopped by the button press effect 3 may be a chance eye (chance up display) for improving the jackpot expectation.

[Modification example]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped at the same time by pressing the effect button 63 once.
The decorative symbol button stop effect may be continuously performed with a plurality of variations. For example, the decorative symbol button stop effect D may be performed by the first variation, the next second variation, the next third variation, and so on. In this case, even if the stop order suggestion display of the button image associated with the decorative symbol is replaced and the order of the decorative symbols to be stopped among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is changed when the effect button 63 is pressed. Good. For example, in the first variation, the decorative symbol 8L is associated with the button image ZF4, the decorative symbol 8C is associated with the button image ZF5, the decorative symbol 8R is associated with the button image ZF6, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are associated with each other. The stop order is as follows: decorative symbol 8L → decorative symbol 8C → decorative symbol 8R. In the second variation, the decorative symbol 8C is associated with the button image ZF4, the decorative symbol 8R is associated with the button image ZF5, and the decorative symbol 8L is assigned. The button image ZF6 may be associated with each other so that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the order of decorative symbol 8C → decorative symbol 8R → decorative symbol 8L.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative symbol button stop effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect, when the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R is variablely displayed, the button image is displayed, and then the effect button 63 is operated. At least one of the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative pattern can be stopped from fluctuating by the player, so that the player can enjoy the fluctuating effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are a group of decorative symbols each consisting of a large number of decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are changing by operating the effect button 63 are displayed. At least one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative pattern can be stopped from fluctuating by the player, so that the player can enjoy the fluctuating effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol button stop effects B to D, the button image ZF1, the button image ZF2, and the button image ZF3 are displayed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed, and then the effect button 63 is operated. As a result, one of the decorative symbols 8L and / or the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative pattern can be stopped from fluctuating by the player, so that the player can enjoy the fluctuating effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol button stop effects B to D, the button image ZF1, the button image ZF2, and the button image ZF3 are displayed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed, and then the effect button 63 is operated. As a result, one of the decorative symbols 8L is stopped and displayed, and then, by further operating the effect button 63, one of the decorative symbols 8C is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative symbols can be stopped by the player one by one, so that the player can enjoy the variable effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect D, the button image ZF4, the button image ZF5, and the button image ZF6 are displayed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed, and the stop order is suggested in these button images. An image is included, and each time the effect button 63 is operated, the variation of the decorative symbol associated with the button image including the stop order suggestion image is stopped in the order based on the stop order suggestion image. According to this configuration, the decorative symbols can be changed and stopped one by one by the player in a state where the stop order of the decorative symbols is known, so that the player can enjoy the variable effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZF-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation means that can be operated by a player.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of varyingly displaying a plurality of decorative patterns.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the first operation means representing the operation means.
The third display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying at least one of the plurality of decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner in the first display effect.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed by operating the operation means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZF-1.
The plurality of decorative symbols include a first decorative symbol group and a second decorative symbol group.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, one of the first decorative symbol groups is stopped and displayed by operating the operating means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZF-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second operation means image representing the operation means.
The fifth display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying at least one decorative symbol in the second decorative symbol group that is variablely displayed in the first display effect.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and then the fifth display effect is performed by operating the operation means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZF-3.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed. After the second display effect and the fourth display effect, the operation means is operated to perform the third display effect, and after the third display effect, the operation means is again operated. The fifth display effect is performed by being operated.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZF-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of displaying the first stop order suggestion image and the second stop order suggestion image.
The first stop order suggestion image is associated with the first operating means image in the second display effect, and when the operating means is operated, the first of the plurality of decorative symbols It is an image suggesting that the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol group is stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbol group.
The second stop order suggestion image is associated with the second operating means image in the fourth display effect, and when the operating means is operated, the second of the plurality of decorative symbols It is an image suggesting that the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol group is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol group.
When the combination effect includes the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, and the sixth display effect. There is
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed when the second display effect and the fourth display effect are performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ The first operation means image is on the fluctuation line of the first decorative symbol group. The second operating means image is on the variation line of the second decorative symbol group.
○ The stop order of the first decorative symbol group and the second decorative symbol group changes when the fluctuation changes.
○ The stop positions of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group deviate from the reach line. The decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol group are the same symbol.
○ The combination production is performed during the pseudo-continuous production.
○ The stop display mode of the decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol group is a chance-up mode.
○ It is done with the same fluctuation.

The icon display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. This icon display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Icon display effect A]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect A. In the icon effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), the icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3 are displayed. The icon ZG1 includes a character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo-continuous production and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit", which suggests a jackpot, and a third character that is different from the first character and the second character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (C), the icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (D), the icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form an effect from the first formation to the second formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape with an interval between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (E), the icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, one of a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 arranged in the second formation is selected. The figure shows how the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (F), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Icon display effect B]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect B. In the icon effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 149 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), the icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3) are displayed one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). Appears (displays). The icon ZG1 includes a character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo-continuous production and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit", which suggests a jackpot, and a third character that is different from the first character and the second character. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), the icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape with the icons spaced apart. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (D), the icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form an effect from the first formation to the second formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape with spaces between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (E), the icon is retired. In this icon withdrawal appearance, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 in the second formation state are displayed one by one from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10) to the outside of the display device. It is a production in which all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit. The figure shows that the three icons ZG1 have left and the icon ZG1 is about to leave. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (F), the icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have left the display device appear again on the display device. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a and appear one by one on the display screen 7a, and move to the left side of the display screen 7a at low speed. Further, in the icon reappearance effect, the button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the substantially center of the display screen 7a. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 move behind (back side) of the button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (G), the icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect are selected, and one icon that moves the display screen 7a at a low speed is selected. Specifically, when the player who sees the button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect presses the effect button 63, one of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 reappeared in the icon reappearance effect. Select. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon on the back side of the button image ZG4 (superimposed on the button image ZG4) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an icon may be randomly selected when the effect button 63 is pressed. The figure shows how the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Icon display effect C]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect C. In the icon effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 150 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (B), the icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3) are displayed one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). Appears (displays). The icon ZG1 includes a character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo-continuous production and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit", which suggests a jackpot, and a third character that is different from the first character and the second character. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (C), the icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape so as to overlap with the adjacent icon (so as to be in contact with the adjacent icon). At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (D), the icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form an effect from the first formation to the second formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape so as to overlap with the adjacent icon (contact with the adjacent icon). At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (E), the icon is retired and appears. In this icon withdrawal appearance, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 in the second formation state are displayed one by one from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10) to the outside of the display device. It is a production in which all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit. The figure shows that the three icons ZG1 have left and the icon ZG1 is about to leave. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (F), the icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have left the display device appear again on the display device. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a and appear one by one on the display screen 7a, and move to the left side of the display screen 7a at low speed. Further, in the icon reappearance effect, the button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the substantially center of the display screen 7a. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 move behind (back side) of the button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (G), the icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect are selected, and one icon that moves the display screen 7a at a low speed is selected. Specifically, when the player who sees the button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect presses the effect button 63, one of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 reappeared in the icon reappearance effect. Select. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon on the back side of the button image ZG4 (superimposed on the button image ZG4) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an icon may be randomly selected when the effect button 63 is pressed. The figure shows how the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Icon display effect D]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect D. In the icon effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 151 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), the icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3) are displayed one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). Appears (displays). The icon ZG1 includes a character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo-continuous production and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit", which suggests a jackpot, and a third character that is different from the first character and the second character. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (C), the icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape so as to overlap with the adjacent icon (so as to be in contact with the adjacent icon). At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are moving (rotating) counterclockwise. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 may be moved clockwise, or may be moved so that the size of the formation (diameter of the circle) increases while maintaining the circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (D), the icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form an effect from the first formation to the second formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape so as to overlap with the adjacent icon (contact with the adjacent icon). At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 may be moved (rotated) counterclockwise, or may be moved so as to increase the size of the formation while maintaining the H shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (E), the icon is retired. In this icon withdrawal appearance, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 in the second formation state are displayed one by one from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10) to the outside of the display device. It is a production in which all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit. The figure shows that the three icons ZG1 have left and the icon ZG1 is about to leave. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (F), the icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have left the display device appear again on the display device. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a and appear one by one on the display screen 7a, and move to the left side of the display screen 7a at low speed. Further, in the icon reappearance effect, the button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the substantially center of the display screen 7a. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 move behind (back side) of the button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (G), the icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect are selected, and one icon that moves the display screen 7a at a low speed is selected. Specifically, when the player who sees the button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect presses the effect button 63, one of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 reappeared in the icon reappearance effect. Select. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon on the back side of the button image ZG4 (superimposed on the button image ZG4) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an icon may be randomly selected when the effect button 63 is pressed. The figure shows how the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Modification example]
In the above icon display effect, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 each include a character and a character suggesting subsequent development, but in addition to these, a jackpot expectation degree and the like may be added.
In the above icon display effects B to D, the positions of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that enter the display device at the time of the icon appearance effect and the positions that enter at the time of the icon exit appearance are almost the same, but are different. May be good.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the above icon display effect, in the icon appearance effect, after the effect of displaying a plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG3 is performed, the effect of forming the first formation of the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG3 is performed. After that, a plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, and ZG3 form a second formation. According to this configuration, since the plurality of icons form two formations in order, it is possible to improve the interest of the icon production without getting tired of the icon production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above icon display effects B to D, in the icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 appear one by one, and a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are displayed. According to this configuration, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be recognized one by one, so that the interest of the icon production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the icon display effect D, in the icon formation effect, formations are formed so that the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 overlap each other. According to this configuration, since the gap between the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 is suppressed, the outer shape of the formed formation can be easily recognized, and the interest of the icon production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above icon display effect D, in the icon formation effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 move within the formation while forming the formation. According to this configuration, the formation formed by the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be moved, so that the interest of the formation production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above icon display effects B to D, after the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a formation in the display devices (main display device 7, sub-display device 10) due to the appearance of the icons, these plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2 and ZG3 exit the display device one by one from the display device. According to this configuration, the exit of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be recognized one by one, so that the interest of the icon production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZG-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of icons.
The second display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons form a first formation.
The third display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons form a second formation.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZG-1.
The first display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons appear one by one on the display means from outside the display means to display the plurality of icons.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZG-1 or the aspect ZG-2.
In the second display effect or the third display effect, the plurality of icons form the formation so as to overlap each other.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZG-1 to ZG-3.
In the second display effect or the third display effect, the plurality of icons move within the formation while forming the formation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZG-1 to ZG-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons exit the display means one by one from the display means.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ After the fourth display effect, a plurality of icons that have left the display means appear again one by one in the display means.
○ The icon that exited the display means in the fourth display effect returns to the inside of the display means from the direction opposite to the exit direction. You may return from the same position as the exit position. In this case, the icon returning to the display means may be enlarged. Further, the icon returned in the display means or the operation means image representing the operation means may be displayed on the variable line of the decorative pattern. Further, an icon corresponding to the operation means image may be selected by operating the operation means, and an effect corresponding to the icon (such as a reach effect using the character of the icon) may be performed.

The effect execution confirmation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155. The effect execution confirmation effects A to D can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect execution confirmation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10.

[Direction execution confirmed production A]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 152 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), the preview image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance effect, the effect notice image PNG which is hexagonal and has "continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. What this effect preview image PNG suggests is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "2". Further, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (E), the execution confirmation effect is executed. In the execution confirmation effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3, and moves from the display screen 7a to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the background of the effect preview image PNG is red. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (F), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the special symbol "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continue", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (G), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (H), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".

[Direction execution confirmation production B]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 153 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (B), the preview image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance effect, the effect notice image PNG which is hexagonal and has "continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. What this effect preview image PNG suggests is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "2". Further, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (E), the preview image disappearance effect is executed. The notice image disappearance effect is an effect in which the effect notice image PNG disappears from the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (F), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. This fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display device 7a. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at "2", and the middle effect symbol 8C stops at "1". It should be noted that the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Direction execution confirmation production C]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 154 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), the preview image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance effect, the effect notice image PNG which is hexagonal and has "continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. What this effect preview image PNG suggests is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "2". Further, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (E), the preview image disappearance effect is executed. The notice image disappearance effect is an effect in which the effect notice image PNG disappears from the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (F), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the special symbol "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continue", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (G), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (H), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".

[Direction execution confirmed production D]
FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 155 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), the preview image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance effect, the effect notice image PNG which is hexagonal and has "SP" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. This effect preview image PNG suggests an SP reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "2". Further, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (E), the execution confirmation effect is executed. In the execution confirmation effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3, and moves from the display screen 7a to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the background of the effect preview image PNG is red. The reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (F), the reach development effect is executed. In this reach development effect, the message image MSG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the message image MSG is "developed".

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (G), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins here, the expectation for the jackpot will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot portions of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Therefore, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "2". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the effect execution confirmed effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the effect notice image PNG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the effect notice image PNG moves to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to execute the effect suggested by the effect notice image PNG. Is determined (FIGS. 152 (B) to (E), FIGS. 155 (B) to (E)). According to this configuration, since the whereabouts of the production notice image PNG are thrilled, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the effect notice image PNG on the display screen 7a, the area at the end of the display screen 7a is moved (FIGS. 152 (C) (D), 153 (C) (D)). , FIG. 154 (C) (D), FIG. 155 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, since the whereabouts of the production notice image PNG are thrilled, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect preview image PNG moves on a predetermined route of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 152 (C) (D), FIG. 153 (C) (D), FIG. 154 (C). ) (D), FIGS. 155 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, the behavior of the effect preview image PNG can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect is performed using the effect preview image PNG that announces the effect to be executed later (FIGS. 152 (B), 153 (B), 154 (B), and 155 (B). )). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the effect to be executed later, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the notice image disappearance effect is executed in which the effect notice image PNG disappears outside the screen of the display screen 7a without moving to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIG. 153 (E). )) In principle, the non-execution of the effect suggested by the effect preview image PNG is determined. According to this configuration, since the whereabouts of the production notice image PNG are thrilled, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the effect notice image PNG moves to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the background of the effect notice image PNG turns red on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIG. 152 (FIG. 152). E), FIG. 155 (E)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the confirmation of the execution of the effect suggested by the effect preview image PNG, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect execution confirmed effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect preview image PNG that suggests the effect to be executed later is used, but an image that is not directly related to the later effect (for example, a message image such as "super hot") may be used.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the effect notice image PNG moves on a predetermined route of the display screen 7a, but is not limited to this. For example, if the effect preview image is a balloon-like image, the display screen 7a may be floated fluffy.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E2-1]
The first display device that can display images and produce effects,
A game machine including a second display device different from the first display device.
After displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the execution of the specific effect is determined by moving the predetermined image from the display screen of the first display device to the display screen of the second display device. A game machine featuring.

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1.
A gaming machine characterized in that after displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the predetermined image is moved on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2.
The predetermined image is a gaming machine characterized by moving a predetermined route on a display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3.
The predetermined image is a game machine characterized in that it is a notice image for notifying the execution of the specific effect.

[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in principle, non-execution of the specific effect is determined when the predetermined image does not move from the first display device to the second display device.

[Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the predetermined image moves from the display screen of the first display device to the display screen of the second display device, an execution confirmation effect is performed on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-6.
The hold image corresponding to the hold storage can be displayed using the display screen of the second display device.
A gaming machine characterized in that the held image is displayed on a display device other than the second display device during the execution of the execution confirmation effect.

[Aspect E2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-7.
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the specific effect may be determined even when the predetermined image does not move from the first display device to the second display device.

The reach development selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 156 to 159. This reach development selection effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Reach development selection production A]
FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect A. In the reach development selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), the reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach selection effect 1, a first area formed from three reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH1, reach effect selection area ZH2, and reach effect selection area ZH3) is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, and ZH3 have a circular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH1 includes the character "A reach". The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH1 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH2 includes the characters "B reach". The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH2 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH3 includes the character "C reach". The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH3 is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), the reach selection effect 2 is performed. In the reach effect selection effect 2, a second area formed from three reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH1A, reach effect selection area ZH2A, and reach effect selection area ZH3A) is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, and ZH3A have a quadrangular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, and ZH3A correspond to the reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, and ZH3 of the first area, respectively, and are larger than the corresponding reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, and ZH3. Therefore, the second region is larger than the first region. The reach effect selection area ZH1A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH1 of the first area, and includes the character “A reach”. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH1A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH2A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH2 of the first area, and includes the character “B reach”. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH2A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH3A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH3 of the first area, and includes the character “C reach”. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH3A is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), the reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH2A is shown by hatching, and the reach effect selection area ZH2A is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate at high speed. Reach display is performed. In this reach effect, the character CRZH performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Reach development selection production B]
FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect B. In the reach development selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), the reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach selection effect 1, a first area formed from three reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH4, reach effect selection area ZH5, and reach effect selection area ZH6) is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5, and ZH6 have a circular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH4 includes the character "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH4 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH5 includes the character "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH5 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH6 includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH6 is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), the reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach effect selection effect 2, a second area formed from four reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH4A, reach effect selection area ZH5A, reach effect selection area ZH6A, and reach effect selection area ZH7A) is displayed. .. The reach effect selection areas ZH4A, ZH5A, and ZH6A have a quadrangular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection areas ZH4A, ZH5A, and ZH6A correspond to the reach effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5, and ZH6 of the first area, respectively, and are larger than the corresponding reach effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5, and ZH6. Therefore, the second region is larger than the first region. The reach effect selection area ZH4A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH4 of the first area, and includes the character "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH4A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH5A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH5 of the first area, and includes the character “B reach”, the second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH5A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH6A includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH6A is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH7A includes the character "D reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The character "D reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH7A is selected, D reach is performed in the reach effect. The five star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is extremely high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), the reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH2A is shown by hatching, and the reach effect selection area ZH2A is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Reach display is performed. In this reach effect, the character CRZH, which is the second character included in the reach effect selection area ZH5A determined by the reach determination effect, performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Reach development selection production C]
FIG. 158 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect C. In the reach development selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 158 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (B), the reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach selection effect 1, a first area formed from four reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH8, reach effect selection area ZH9, reach effect selection area ZH10, and reach effect selection area ZH11) is displayed. .. The reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 have a triangular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH8 includes the character "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH8 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9 includes the character "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH9 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10 includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH10 is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11 includes the character "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The character "E-reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH11 is selected, E-reach is performed in the reach effect. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is relatively higher than in the case of the three star marks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (C), the reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, a second reach effect selection area (reach effect selection area ZH8A, reach effect selection area ZH9A, reach effect selection area ZH10A, reach effect selection area ZH11A, and reach effect selection area ZH12A) is formed. Area is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A are trapezoidal and are arranged adjacent to each other. Further, the reach effect selection area ZH12A has a diamond shape and is arranged substantially at the center of the reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A correspond to the reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 in the first area, respectively. The first area and the second area have the same size because they correspond to the entire areas of the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R, respectively. The reach effect selection area ZH8A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH8 of the first area, and includes the character “A reach”, the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH8A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH9 of the first area, and includes the character “B reach”, the second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH9A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10A includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH10A is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11A includes the character "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The character "E reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH11A is selected, E reach is performed in the reach effect. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is higher than the three star marks. The reach effect selection area ZH12A includes the character "D reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The character "D reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected, D reach is performed in the reach effect. The five star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is extremely high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (D), the reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH12A is shown by hatching, and the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate at high speed. Reach display is performed. In this reach effect, the character CRZH1 which is the fourth character included in the reach effect selection area ZH12A determined in the reach determination effect performs various effects. After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Reach development selection production D]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect D. In the reach development selection effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 159 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (B), the reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach selection effect 1, a first area formed from four reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH8, reach effect selection area ZH9, reach effect selection area ZH10, and reach effect selection area ZH11) is displayed. .. The reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 have a triangular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH8 includes the character "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH8 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9 includes the character "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH9 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10 includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH10 is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11 includes the character "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The character "E-reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH11 is selected, E-reach is performed in the reach effect. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is relatively higher than in the case of the three star marks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (C), the reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, a second reach effect selection area (reach effect selection area ZH8A, reach effect selection area ZH9A, reach effect selection area ZH10A, reach effect selection area ZH11A, and reach effect selection area ZH12A) is formed. Area is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A are trapezoidal and are arranged adjacent to each other. Further, the reach effect selection area ZH12A has a diamond shape and is arranged substantially at the center of the reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A correspond to the reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 in the first area, respectively. The first area and the second area have the same size because they correspond to the entire areas of the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R, respectively. The reach effect selection area ZH8A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH8 of the first area, and includes the character “A reach”, the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH8A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH9 of the first area, and includes the character “B reach”, the second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH9A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10A includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH10A is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11A includes the character "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The character "E reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH11A is selected, E reach is performed in the reach effect. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is higher than the three star marks. The reach effect selection area ZH12A includes the character "D reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The character "D reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected, D reach is performed in the reach effect. The five star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is extremely high. Further, the fourth character included in the reach effect selection area ZH12A has advanced to the reach effect selection area ZH8A and the reach effect selection area ZH9A adjacent to the reach effect selection area ZH12A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (D), the reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH12A is shown by hatching, and the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate at high speed. Reach display is performed. In this reach effect, the character CRZH1 which is the fourth character included in the reach effect selection area ZH12A determined in the reach determination effect performs various effects. After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.
The reach development selection effects A to D are performed under the same variation.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the reach development selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the above reach development selection effect, a first area formed of a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 is displayed, and then a second area composed of a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, ZH3A is displayed. The area is displayed. According to this configuration, two areas including different reach effect selection areas are displayed in order, so that the player can be given an exciting feeling at the time of reach selection. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above reach development selection effect, a first area formed of a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 is displayed, and then a second area composed of a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, ZH3A is displayed. Areas are displayed, and the first area and the second area are the same size. According to this configuration, two regions that include a plurality of different reach selection regions and have the same size are displayed in order. Therefore, a plurality of reach selection regions are selected in the first region and the second region. It is possible to easily recognize the difference in the area, and it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement when selecting the reach. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned reach development selection effect, the plurality of reach effect selection areas are areas including a jackpot expectation suggestion image that suggests a jackpot expectation. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of excitement at the time of reach selection. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the reach development selection effect, each of the plurality of reach effect selection areas is an area including a character image. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of excitement at the time of reach selection. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the reach development selection effect D, the character image included in the predetermined reach effect selection area advances to another reach selection area adjacent to the predetermined reach effect selection area. According to this configuration, the characters included in the predetermined reach selection area can be made to stand out, and when the predetermined reach selection area is selected, the player can be given a greater sense of excitement. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZH-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first area including a plurality of reach effect selection areas.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second area including a plurality of reach effect selection areas.
The reach effect selection area is an area including a reach effect suggestion image suggesting development to a predetermined reach effect.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZH-1.
The first region and the second region have the same size.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZH-1 or the aspect ZH-2.
The reach effect selection area is an area including a jackpot expectation suggestion image suggesting a jackpot expectation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZH-1 to ZH-3.
The reach effect selection area is an area including a character image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZH-4.
The character image included in the predetermined reach selection area has advanced to another reach selection area adjacent to the predetermined reach selection area.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ The second area has a larger number of reach selection areas than the first area.
○ Each reach selection area in the second area and each reach selection area corresponding in the first area (reach selection area including the same reach effect suggestion image as the reach selection area in the first area) have a size, Or the shape is different.
○ The specific reach selection area in the second area and the corresponding reach selection area in the first area (the reach selection area including the same reach effect suggestion image as the reach selection area in the first area) are expected to be big hits. , The character image does not change.
○ In the reach effect, a character image of the selected reach selection area appears.

The two-way group effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. This two-way group effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Two-way group production A]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect A. In the two-way group effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 160 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (B), the icon group display effect is performed. In this icon group display effect, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 which are icon images is displayed in the left area of the display screen 7a, and the formation is moved to the right area of the display screen 7a to move to the right area of the display screen 7a. It disappears out of. The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. In the icon group display effect, the first group image is displayed in the left area of the display screen 7a, and the heart image ZI1 moves at a relatively different speed without maintaining the formation of the display screen 7a. You may move to the right side area and disappear outside the display screen 7a. Further, as the icon image, a circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (C), a character group display effect is performed. In this character group display effect, a second group image including a plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2, which are character images, is displayed in the right area of the display screen 7a, and the formation is moved to the left area of the display screen 7a to move to the left area of the display screen 7a. It disappears out of. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. In the character group display effect, the second group image is displayed in the right area of the display screen 7a, and the Nico Nico image ZI2 moves at a relatively different speed without maintaining the formation of the display screen 7a. You may move to the right side area and disappear outside the display screen 7a. Further, as the character image, a character image imitating the whole body wearing a combat uniform may be used instead of the Nico Nico image ZI2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a character image CRZI that is an enlargement of the Nico Nico image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Two-way group production B]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect B. In the two-way group effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 161 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (B), the group display effect 1 is performed. In this group display effect 1, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 which are icon images is displayed in the left side area of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of smiling images ZI2 which are character images are displayed in the right side area of the display screen 7a. After that, the first group image moves in the first direction (the direction toward the right region of the display screen 7a, that is, the right direction), and the second group image moves in the direction opposite to the first direction. It moves in the second direction (the direction toward the left side region of the display screen 7a, that is, the left direction). The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has low transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. Nico Nico image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in the group display effect 1, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) move in a constant formation when they move. Not limited to this, when the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) moves, each heart image ZI1 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. Further, when the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) moves, each Nico Nico image ZI2 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. As the icon image, a circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1. Further, as the character image, a character image imitating the whole body wearing a combat uniform may be used instead of the Nico Nico image ZI2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (C), the group display effect 2 is performed. In this group display effect 2, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) are moved so that they overlap each other near the center of the display screen 7a. , The first group image moves in the first direction as it is, disappears from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a, and the second group image moves in the second direction as it is. It disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiling image ZI2. Therefore, since the transparency of the heart image ZI1 is low, if the heart image ZI1 is in front of the smile image ZI2, the smile image ZI2 is hidden by the heart image ZI1. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the smiling image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. In this case, if there is a smiling image ZI2 before the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 is hidden by the smiling image ZI2. Further, in this group display effect 2, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) do not overlap in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a and pass each other. You may do so.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a character image CRZI that is an enlargement of the Nico Nico image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Two-way group production C]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect C. In the two-way group effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 162 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), the group display effect 1 is performed. In this group display effect 1, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 which are icon images is displayed in the left side area of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of smiling images ZI2 which are character images are displayed in the right side area of the display screen 7a. After that, the first group image moves in the first direction (the direction toward the right region of the display screen 7a, that is, the right direction), and the second group image moves in the direction opposite to the first direction. It moves in the second direction (the direction toward the left side region of the display screen 7a, that is, the left direction). The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has high transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. Nico Nico image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in the group display effect 1, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) move in a constant formation when they move. Not limited to this, when the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) moves, each heart image ZI1 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. Further, when the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) moves, each Nico Nico image ZI2 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. As the icon image, a circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1. Further, as the character image, a character image imitating the whole body wearing a combat uniform may be used instead of the Nico Nico image ZI2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), the group display effect 2 is performed. In this group display effect 2, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) are moved so that they overlap each other near the center of the display screen 7a. , The first group image moves in the first direction as it is, disappears from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a, and the second group image moves in the second direction as it is. It disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiling image ZI2. However, since the heart image ZI1 has high transparency, even if the heart image ZI1 is in front of the smile image ZI2, the smile image ZI2 can be visually recognized through the heart image ZI1. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the smiling image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. Then, the transparency of the heart image ZI1 may be low, and the transparency of the smiling image ZI2 may be high. In this case, if there is a smiling image ZI2 in front of the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 can be visually recognized through the smiling image ZI2. Further, in this group display effect 2, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) do not overlap in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a and pass each other. You may do so.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a character image CRZI that is an enlargement of the Nico Nico image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Two-way group production D]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect D. In the two-way group effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 163 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (B), the group display effect 1 is performed. In this group display effect 1, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 which are icon images is displayed in the left area of the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L, and a plurality of smiling images ZI2 which are character images are displayed. It is displayed in the right side area of the display screen 7a, and then the first group image moves in the first direction (the direction toward the right side area of the display screen 7a, that is, the right direction), and the second group image is the first. It moves in the second direction (the direction toward the left side region of the display screen 7a, that is, the left direction), which is the direction opposite to the direction of. The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has high transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. Nico Nico image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in the group display effect 1, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) move in a constant formation when they move. Not limited to this, when the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) moves, each heart image ZI1 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. Further, when the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) moves, each Nico Nico image ZI2 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. As the icon image, a circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1. Further, as the character image, a character image imitating the whole body wearing a combat uniform may be used instead of the Nico Nico image ZI2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), the group display effect 2 is performed. In this group display effect 2, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) move, so that the left sub display device near the center of the display screen 7a. After overlapping with 10L and the right sub-display device 10R, the first group image moves in the first direction as it is, disappears from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a, and the second group image. The group image of is moved in the second direction as it is, and disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiling image ZI2. However, since the heart image ZI1 has high transparency, even if the heart image ZI1 is in front of the smile image ZI2, the smile image ZI2 can be visually recognized through the heart image ZI1. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the smiling image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. Then, the transparency of the heart image ZI1 may be low, and the transparency of the smiling image ZI2 may be high. In this case, if there is a smiling image ZI2 in front of the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 can be visually recognized through the smiling image ZI2. Further, in the group display effect 2, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) may not overlap and may pass each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a character image CRZI that is an enlargement of the Nico Nico image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.
The two-way group effects A to D are performed in the same variation.

[Modification example]
In the two-way group effect, the first group image moves in the first direction (right direction), and the second group image moves in the second direction (left direction) opposite to the first direction. However, the movement is not limited to this, and the first group image and the second group image may be moved in different directions from the opposite direction. For example, the first group image may move upward and the second group image may move leftward.
In the above two-way group effect, the first group image is formed of an icon image and the second group image is formed of a character image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first group image and the first group image are formed. The second group image may be formed of an icon image, the first group image and the second group image may be formed of a character image, the first group image, and the first group image. The group image 2 may be formed by an image other than the icon image or the character image.
In the above-mentioned two-way group effect, a predetermined image may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 when the character group display effect, the group display effect 1, or the group display effect 2 is being performed. In this case, the predetermined image on the illumination panel 18 visually displays the first group image and / or the second group image. For example, in the illumination panel 18, a predetermined image may be displayed on the display screen 7a, avoiding the area corresponding to the area where the first group image and the second group image overlap.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the two-way group production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the two-way group effect, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 is displayed, and the second group image including the plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2 is displayed in the same variation. According to this configuration, since two group images are displayed in the same variation, it is possible to excite the group production and improve the interest of the group production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the two-way group effect, when the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 is displayed in the same variation, the second group image including the plurality of smiling images ZI2 is displayed. According to this configuration, since two group productions are performed at the same time in the same fluctuation, the group production can be excited and the interest of the group production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above two-direction group production, in the same variation, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 moves in the first direction, and the second group image including the plurality of smiling images ZI2 moves in the first direction. Moves in a different second direction. According to this configuration, since the two group images move in different directions in the same fluctuation, the group effect can be dynamically and gorgeously performed, and the interest of the group effect can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above two-direction group production, in the same variation, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 moves in the first direction, and the second group image including the plurality of smiling images ZI2 moves in the first direction. Moves in the second direction in the opposite direction. According to this configuration, in the same fluctuation, the two group images move in the direction of relatively approaching or moving away from each other, so that the group production can be performed dynamically and brilliantly, and the interest of the group production can be improved. Can be done. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the two-way group effect, the heart image ZI1 of the first group image is an icon image, and the smiling image ZI2 of the second group image is a character image. According to this configuration, since the group production is performed by the group images of different categories in the same fluctuation, the group production can be performed gorgeously, and the interest of the group production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZI-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a display in which a first group image including a plurality of images moves.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a moving second group image including a plurality of images.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the same variation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZI-1.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed in the same variation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZI-2.
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first group image moves in the first direction, and in the second display effect, the second group image moves in the first direction. Move in a second direction different from
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZI-3.
The first direction is the opposite direction of the second direction.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZI-4.
The plurality of images of the first group image are icon images, and are
The plurality of images of the second group image are character images.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ The first group image and the second group image overlap. A plurality of images of one group image include a transparent portion through which at least a part is transmitted. A plurality of images of the second group image may also have a transparent portion.
○ A reach effect is performed using an image (for example, an icon image, a character image) that constitutes the first group image or the second group image.
○ The first group image and the second group image pass through the main display device and the sub display device. The first group image is generated from the main display device and the second group image is generated from the sub display device.
○ A third display device is provided in the foreground, and the first group image and the second group image can be seen through the gaps in the display images.

The acquired ball output display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167. This acquired ball output display effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Acquired ball display production A]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the acquired ball output display effect A. In the acquired ball output display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 164 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), the effect of displaying the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this planned acquisition number display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, the planned acquisition number display ZJ2, the planned acquisition number display ZJ3, and the planned acquisition number display ZJ4 are displayed. The number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is represented by the characters "+15", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is represented by the characters "+105", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is represented by the characters "+150", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is represented by the characters "+300", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300". The ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displays the number of expected balls to be acquired are displayed in the same mode when representing the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different modes when representing different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, the "same aspect" is, for example, the same color and / or pattern, and / or size, and / or shape, and / or font. Also, "different aspects" are, for example, different colors and / or patterns and / or sizes, and / or shapes, and / or fonts. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this production of the number of expected balls to be acquired, the size of the display of the number of expected balls to be acquired, ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4, may be increased as the display indicates the larger number of acquired balls. For example, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is large, and the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. You may. In the figure, the appearance of different colors and patterns of the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is shown by using various hatchings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (D), the maximum number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this maximum planned number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum number of planned balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. Maximum number of balls to be acquired ZJ5 represents the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired represented by the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned effect of displaying the number of expected balls to be acquired, or is acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired, ZJ5, is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game is 2000. Further, in the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
From the above decorative pattern fluctuation effect to the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (E), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. The payout acquisition display ZJ6 represents the number of balls acquired by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it is shown that it is one round. The character image CRZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. Further, in the jackpot game display effect, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Acquired ball display production B]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the acquired ball output display effect B. In the acquired ball output display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 165 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), the effect of displaying the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this planned acquisition number display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, the planned acquisition number display ZJ2, the planned acquisition number display ZJ3, and the planned acquisition number display ZJ4 are displayed. The number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is represented by the characters "+15", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is represented by the characters "+105", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is represented by the characters "+150", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is represented by the characters "+300", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300". The ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displays the number of expected balls to be acquired are displayed in the same mode when representing the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different modes when representing different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, the "same aspect" is, for example, the same color and / or pattern, and / or size, and / or shape, and / or font. Also, "different aspects" are, for example, different colors and / or patterns and / or sizes, and / or shapes, and / or fonts. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this production of the number of expected balls to be acquired, the size of the display of the number of expected balls to be acquired, ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4, may be increased as the display indicates the larger number of acquired balls. For example, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is large, and the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. You may. In the figure, the appearance of different colors and patterns of the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is shown by using various hatchings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (D), an enlarged display effect of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this effect of expanding the number of balls to be acquired, the display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are moving (moving) and expanding. Further, in the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (E), the maximum number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this maximum planned number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum number of planned balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. Maximum number of balls to be acquired ZJ5 represents the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired represented by the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned effect of displaying the number of expected balls to be acquired, or is acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired, ZJ5, is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game is 2000. Further, in the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
From the above decorative pattern fluctuation effect to the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (F), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. The payout acquisition display ZJ6 represents the number of balls acquired by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it is shown that it is one round. The character image CRZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Acquired ball display production C]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the acquired ball output display effect C. In the acquired ball output display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), the number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this planned acquisition number display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, the planned acquisition number display ZJ2, the planned acquisition number display ZJ3, and the planned acquisition number display ZJ4 are displayed. The number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is represented by the characters "+15", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is represented by the characters "+105", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is represented by the characters "+150", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is represented by the characters "+300", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300". The ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displays the number of expected balls to be acquired are displayed in the same mode when representing the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different modes when representing different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, the "same aspect" is, for example, the same color and / or pattern, and / or size, and / or shape, and / or font. Also, "different aspects" are, for example, different colors and / or patterns and / or sizes, and / or shapes, and / or fonts. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this production of the number of expected balls to be acquired, the size of the display of the number of expected balls to be acquired, ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4, may be increased as the display indicates the larger number of acquired balls. For example, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is large, and the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. You may. In the figure, the appearance of different colors and patterns of the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is shown by using various hatchings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (D), an enlarged display effect of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this effect of expanding the number of balls to be acquired, the display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are moving (moving) and expanding. Further, in the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (E), a reduction display effect of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this planned acquisition number reduction display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is reduced while moving (moving) toward a predetermined position (near the center of the display screen 7a). .. Further, in the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. In addition, after the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166 (D), the reduction display effect of the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166 (E) is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. After the reduced number display effect, the enlarged number display effect of the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166 (D) may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (F), the maximum number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this maximum planned number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum number of planned balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. Maximum number of balls to be acquired ZJ5 represents the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired represented by the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned effect of displaying the number of expected balls to be acquired, or is acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired, ZJ5, is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game is 2000. Further, in the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
From the above decorative pattern fluctuation effect to the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (G), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. The payout acquisition display ZJ6 represents the number of balls acquired by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it is shown that it is one round. The character image CRZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Acquired ball display production D]
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the acquired ball output display effect D. In the acquired ball output display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 167 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this planned acquisition number display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, the planned acquisition number display ZJ2, the planned acquisition number display ZJ3, and the planned acquisition number display ZJ4 are displayed while moving and overlapping each other. To. The number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is represented by the characters "+15", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is represented by the characters "+105", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is represented by the characters "+150", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is represented by the characters "+300", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300". The ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displays the number of expected balls to be acquired are displayed in the same mode when representing the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different modes when representing different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, the "same aspect" is, for example, the same color and / or pattern, and / or size, and / or shape, and / or font. Also, "different aspects" are, for example, different colors and / or patterns and / or sizes, and / or shapes, and / or fonts. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this production of the number of expected balls to be acquired, the size of the display of the number of expected balls to be acquired, ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4, may be increased as the display indicates the larger number of acquired balls. For example, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is large, and the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. You may. In the figure, the appearance of different colors and patterns of the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is shown by using various hatchings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), an enlarged display effect of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this planned acquisition number expansion display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 move and expand while overlapping with each other. Further, in the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (E), a reduction display effect of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this planned acquisition number reduction display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are moved and reduced toward a predetermined position (near the center of the display screen 7a) and overlap each other. Further, in the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. In addition, after the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 167 (D), the reduction display effect of the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 167 (E) is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. After the reduced number display effect, the enlarged number display effect of the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 167 (D) may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (F), the maximum number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this maximum planned number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum number of planned balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. Maximum number of balls to be acquired ZJ5 represents the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired represented by the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned effect of displaying the number of expected balls to be acquired, or is acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired, ZJ5, is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game is 2000. Further, in the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
From the above decorative pattern fluctuation effect to the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (G), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. The payout acquisition display ZJ6 represents the number of balls acquired by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it is shown that it is one round. The character image CRZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned earned ball display effect, the decorative symbol variation effect to the maximum expected number of balls display effect are performed with the same variation, and the jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, but the number of balls to be acquired is not limited to this. The display effect, the expected number of acquired balls enlarged display effect, the expected acquired number of balls reduced display effect, and the maximum expected acquired number of balls display effect may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the winning ball display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the above-mentioned acquisition ball output display effect, after the effect of displaying the jackpot symbol and notifying the jackpot is performed, the effect of displaying a plurality of planned acquisition balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is performed, and then the maximum acquisition is performed. An effect of displaying the planned number of balls ZJ5 is performed, and then a jackpot game effect is performed. According to this configuration, after the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game can be recognized in small pieces by the display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4, the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game is displayed by ZJ5. Since the number of balls to be acquired can be recognized, it is possible to enjoy a large joy after a small joy, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned production of the number of expected balls to be acquired, when a plurality of productions of displaying the number of expected balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are performed, the same number of balls among the plurality of displays of the number of expected balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is displayed. The number of balls to be acquired is displayed in the same manner (for example, the same color and / or pattern and / or size, and / or shape, and / or font). According to this configuration, in the expected number of acquired balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4, it becomes easy to recognize each other with the same number of expected acquired balls, in other words, the expected number of acquired balls is different. It becomes easier to find the number display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the display effect related to the number of balls to be acquired. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned acquisition ball number display effect, when a production of performing a plurality of planned acquisition ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is performed, a different number of balls among the plurality of planned acquisition ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is displayed. The number of balls to be acquired is displayed in different modes (for example, different colors and / or patterns and / or sizes, and / or shapes, and / or fonts). According to this configuration, in the expected number of acquired balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4, it becomes easy to recognize each other with the same number of expected acquired balls, in other words, the expected number of acquired balls is different. It becomes easier to find the number display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the display effect related to the number of balls to be acquired. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above-mentioned acquisition ball output display production, before the jackpot game production, a production of expanding a plurality of planned acquisition number number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is performed. According to this configuration, the expected number of acquired balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is emphasized, so that it becomes easier to recognize the displayed number of expected acquired balls, and the interest of the display effect related to the number of acquired balls is improved. Can be made to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above-mentioned acquisition ball output display effect, before the jackpot game production, a plurality of planned acquisition ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are reduced while being moved to a predetermined position, and then the maximum number of planned acquisition ball number display is performed. ZJ5 is performed. According to this configuration, the display of the number of balls to be acquired becomes difficult to recognize, and after driving the player's anxiety, the display of the maximum number of balls to be acquired is recognized, which is often used by the player. You can feel the excitement of. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZJ-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot symbol to notify the jackpot.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of planned acquisition media representing the number of game media that can be acquired in the jackpot game.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the maximum number of media to be acquired, which represents the maximum number of media that can be acquired in the jackpot game.
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, after the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed. After the third display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZJ-1.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the display of the number of planned acquisition media representing the same number of media is displayed in the same manner among the display of the number of planned acquisition media.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZJ-2.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, among the plurality of display of the number of planned acquisition media, the display of the number of planned acquisition media representing a different number of media is displayed in different modes.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZJ-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of expanding the display of the number of media to be acquired.
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect, and may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the fourth display effect is performed after the fifth display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-5]
A game machine according to the aspect ZJ-3 or the aspect ZJ-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of reducing the display of the plurality of planned acquisition media while moving the display to a predetermined position.
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect, and may include the sixth display effect.
In the combination effect, after the second display effect, the sixth display effect is performed, and after the sixth display effect, the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ Display the number of media to be acquired so that they overlap each other while moving.
○ The display of the number of media to be acquired is three-dimensional.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the effect button 63 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the select button 68. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image showing a lever or a trigger.

The game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a game machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 60 to 167, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment uses display devices (main display device 7, sub-display device 10, etc.) to perform various effects. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above.
Further, although the game machine 1 includes a sub display device 10 in addition to the main display device 7 (display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. It may be performed, or the display effect performed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 may be performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment, and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Main display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The hold image (hold icon)
10 ... Sub-display device 14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 17 ... Large winning opening opening opening 18 ... Illumination panel 20 ... 1st starting opening (1st entry opening)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd ball entry port)
66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine including a second display means and a third display means different from the first display means and the first display means.
Each of the first display means and the second display means can execute a plurality of types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative pattern on the first display means.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the decorative symbol in a predetermined stop mode in the first display means and the second display means.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and a predetermined image is displayed on the third display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images